diff options
| author | Lukas Fleischer <calcurse@cryptocrack.de> | 2011-02-24 11:36:50 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Lukas Fleischer <calcurse@cryptocrack.de> | 2011-03-03 12:21:25 +0100 |
| commit | 3e15efe917b2a481473568ad95a386def55d34af (patch) | |
| tree | c56713a87dab8067e93e8f11bf4b42378f8f7f83 /doc | |
| parent | 2d938cdcdaa470d521f048d3b29e7a8a97612785 (diff) | |
| download | calcurse-3e15efe917b2a481473568ad95a386def55d34af.tar.gz calcurse-3e15efe917b2a481473568ad95a386def55d34af.zip | |
Convert documentation to AsciiDoc, delete translations.
Diffstat (limited to 'doc')
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/Makefile.am | 18 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual.css | 355 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual.txt | 1112 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual_de.html | 1327 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual_en.html | 1331 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual_es.html | 1347 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual_fr.html | 1505 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual_it.html | 1587 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | doc/manual_nl.html | 1350 |
9 files changed, 1130 insertions, 8802 deletions
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32e99e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +# $calcurse: Makefile.am,v 1.1 2011/02/24 11:36:50 fleischer Exp $ + +AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = foreign + +ASCIIDOC_ARGS = \ + -n \ + -a toc \ + -a icons + +doc_DATA = \ + manual.html + +docdir = $(datadir)/doc/$(PACKAGE) + +.txt.html: +if HAVE_ASCIIDOC + $(AM_V_GEN) $(ASCIIDOC) $(ASCIIDOC_ARGS) $< +endif diff --git a/doc/manual.css b/doc/manual.css deleted file mode 100644 index d84028b..0000000 --- a/doc/manual.css +++ /dev/null @@ -1,355 +0,0 @@ -/* $calcurse: manual.css,v 1.5 2009/07/05 20:32:47 culot Exp $ */ - -/* - * Calcurse - text-based organizer - * - * Copyright (c) 2008 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - */ - -body { - margin: 0; - padding: 0; - padding-top: 10px; - text-align: center; -} - - -@media screen { - #mainContent{ - width: 70%; - overflow: auto; - } - body { - overflow: auto; - background-color: #d3d3d3; - } - pre { - margin-left: 2.5cm; - margin-right: 2cm; - } -} - -@media print { - #mainContent{ - width: 90%; - overflow: visible; - } - body { - overflow: visible; - background-color: #ffffff; - } - pre { - margin-left: -1cm; - margin-right: 2cm; - } -} - -#mainContent{ - margin-right: auto; - margin-left: auto; - padding-left: 10px; - padding-right: 10px; - margin-bottom: 1em; - border: 1px solid gray; - text-align: left; - font-family: arial, helvetica, verdana, sans-serif; - font: 10px/12px cursive; - background-color: white; -} - -#title { - text-align: center !important; - font: 24px/20px cursive !important; -} - -div#mainContent h1 { - text-align: left; - padding: 0.5em; - padding-top: 1em; - font: 20px/16px cursive; -} - -div#mainContent h2 { - margin-left: 1.5cm; - padding-top: 0.5em; -} - -div#mainContent h2, h3 { - margin-bottom: 0; - padding-bottom: 0.3em; -} - -div#mainContent h2 { - font: 14px/14px cursive; -} - -div#mainContent h3 { - font: 12px/12px cursive; -} - -p, blockquote { - text-align: justify; - text-indent: 1cm; - margin-top: 0; -} - -h3, p, div.bib, ul, ol, dl, blockquote { - margin-left: 2.5cm; - margin-right: 2cm; -} - -ul, ol, dl { - margin-top: 0; - margin-bottom: 1em; -} - -dl.compact dt { - float: left; -} - -dl.compact dd { - margin-bottom: 0.5em; -} - -dd { - margin-bottom: 1em; -} - -ul.sub, ol.sub, dl.sub { - margin-left: 0; - list-style: circle; -} - -li { - margin-top: 0.1em; - margin-bottom: 0.1em; -} - -pre { - display: block; - border-left: 1px solid gray; - padding-left: 2em; - margin-right: 2cm; -} - -code { - font-family: monospace; - font-weight: bold; -} - -table { - border-style: solid; - border-collapse: collapse; - border-width: 1px; -} - -div.tab { - padding: 1.5em; - margin-left: 4.5cm; - margin-right: 2cm; -} - -img { - border-style: none; -} - -div.img { - text-align: center; -} - -tr, td, thead, tbody { - margin: 0; -} - -thead { - background-color: gray; - color: black; - text-align: center; -} - -td { - border-style: solid; - border-width: 1px; -} - -span.main { - border-style: none; - border-bottom-style: dashed; - border-bottom-width: 1.5px; - padding: 0.2em; -} - -#toc { - margin-top: 1.5cm; - margin-bottom: 1cm; - padding-top: 0; - padding-bottom: 0.2cm; - border-width: 0; - border-left-width: 1cm; - border-left-color: gray; - border-style: solid; -} - -#toc h1 { - font: 12px/12px cursive; -} - -#toc a { - text-decoration: none; - color: black; -} - -a { - color: black; -} - -#toc li { - list-style-type: none; - margin-top: 0; - margin-bottom: 0; -} - -#toc ul ul li { - margin-top: 0; - margin-bottom: 0; -} - -#toc ul ul ul li { - margin-left: -0.5cm; -} - -#toc ul { - margin-top: 0; - margin-bottom: 0; - margin-left: 0; - padding-left: 1cm; -} - -.todo { - color: green; -} - -div.warn { - margin-top: 1cm; - margin-bottom: 1cm; - border-style: solid; - border-width: thin; - padding: 0.5em; - text-align: justify; -} - -div.warn h1 { - display: inline; - padding: 0.5em; - margin: 0; - font: 8px/10px cursive; -} - -div.res { - text-align: center; -} - -span.res { - border-width: thin; - border-style: solid; -} - -div.footer { - margin: 20px; - margin-left: 4%; - margin-top: 2cm; - border-width: 0; - border-style: solid; - border-top-width: medium; - font-style: italic; - text-align: right; -} - -p.abstract { - margin-left: 3cm; - margin-right: 3cm; -} - -.rq { - text-indent: 0; - font-style: italic; - border-style: solid; - border-width: medium; - border-left-width: 0; - border-top-width: 0; - border-color: gray; - padding: 0.4em; -} - -dl .rq, ol .rq, ul .rq { - margin-left: 0; - margin-right: 0; - border: 0; -} - -p.time { - text-indent: 0; - font-style: italic; - border-style: solid; - border-width: medium; - border-left-width: 0; - border-top-width: 0; - border-color: gray; - padding: 0.4em; - text-align: right; -} - -p.qu { - font-style: italic; - text-align: left; - font: 8px/10px cursive; - border-width: 0; - border-left-width: thin; - border-left-color: gray; - border-style: double; - color: gray; -} - -.valorise { - text-decoration: underline; -} - -.big { - font-weight: bolder; - font: 12px/12px cursive; -} - -.emp { - font-style: italic; -} - -.tablesubtitle { - font-style: italic; - text-align: center; -} diff --git a/doc/manual.txt b/doc/manual.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..563f9e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/manual.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1112 @@ +//// +/* + * $calcurse: manual.txt,v 1.1 2011/02/24 11:36:50 fleischer Exp $ + * + * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * + * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above + * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + * following disclaimer. + * + * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above + * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + * materials provided with the distribution. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS + * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT + * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR + * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT + * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, + * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT + * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, + * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY + * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT + * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE + * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + */ +//// + +CALCURSE - text-based organizer +=============================== + +Abstract +-------- + +This manual describes `calcurse` functionnalities, and how to use them. The +installation from source is first described, together with the available +command line arguments. The user interface is then presented, with all of the +customizable options that change `calcurse` behavior. Last, bug reporting +procedure is explained, as well as the way one can contribute to `calcurse` +development. + +Introduction +------------ + +`calcurse` is a text-based calendar and scheduling application. It helps +keeping track of events, appointments and everyday tasks. A configurable +notification system reminds user of upcoming deadlines, and the curses based +interface can be customized to suit user needs. All of the commands are +documented within an online help system. + +Overview +-------- + +Creation history +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +I started thinking about this project when I was finishing my Ph.D. in +Astrophysics... It started to be a little hard to organize myself, and I really +needed a good tool to help me in that difficult task ;) + +I like programs which use Text User Interfaces, because they are simple, fast, +portable and efficient, so I thought about working on coding a simple calendar +using such an interface. Moreover, I wanted to go on learning the `C` +language, which I only used for a while during my undergraduate studies. So I +thought that would be the good project to start in order to get organized and +to learn about a few `C` things ! + +Unfortunately, I finished my Ph.D. before finishing `calcurse`, but anyway, I +still wanted to work on it, hoping it would be helpful to other people. So +here it is... + +But why _calcurse_ anyway ? Well, it is simply the concatenation of _CALendar_ +and _nCURSEs_, the name of the library used to build the user interface. + +Important features +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +`Calcurse` is multi-platform and intended to be lightweight, fast and reliable. +It is to be used inside a console or terminal, locally or on a distant machine +within an ssh (or similar) connection. + +`Calcurse` can be run in two different modes : interactive or non-interactive +mode. The first mode allows oneself to view its own personal organizer almost +everywhere, thanks to the text-based interface. The second mode permits to +easily build reminders just by adding `calcurse` with appropriate command line +arguments inside a cron tab or within a shell init script. + +Moreover, `calcurse` was created with the end-user in mind, and tends to be as +friendly as possible. This means a complete on-line help system, together with +having all of the possible actions displayed at any time inside a status bar. +The user interface is configurable, and one can choose between several color +and layout combinations. Key bindings are also configurable, to fit everyone's +needs. Last, a configurable notification system reminds user of upcoming +appointments. The reminders are sent even if the user's interface is not +running, as calcurse is able to run in background. + +Installation +------------ + +Requirements +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +ncurses library +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +`Calcurse` requires only a `C` compiler, such as `cc` or `gcc`, and the +`ncurses` library. It would be very surprising not to have a valid `ncurses` +library already installed on your computer, but if not, you can find it at the +following url: http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/ + +NOTE: It is also possible to link `calcurse` against the `ncursesw` library + (ncurses with support for unicode). However, UTF-8 is not yet supported + by `calcurse`. + +[[installation_requirements_gettext]] +gettext library +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +`calcurse` supports internationalization (*i18n* hereafter) through the +`gettext` utilities. This means `calcurse` can produce multi-lingual messages +if compiled with native language support (i.e. *NLS*). + +However, *NLS* is optionnal and if you do not want to have support for +multi-lingual messages, you can disable this feature. This is done by giving +the `--disable-nls` option to `configure` (see section +<<install_process,Install process>>). To check if the `gettext` utilities are +installed on your system, you can search for the `libintl.h` header file for +instance: + +---- +$ locate libintl.h +---- + +If this header file is not found, then you can obtain the `gettext` sources at +the following url : http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/ + +NOTE: Even if `libintl.h` is found on your system, it can be wise to specify + its location during the <<install_process,install process>>, by using the + `--with-libintl-prefix` option with `configure`. Indeed, the `configure` + could fail to locate this library if installed in an uncommon place. + +[[install_process]] +Install process +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +First you need to gunzip and untar the source archive: + +---- +$ tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz +---- + +Once you meet the requirements and have extracted the archive, the install +process is quite simple, and follows the standard three steps process: + +---- +$ ./configure +$ make +$ make install # (may require root privilege) +---- + +Use `./configure --help` to obtain a list of possible options. + +calcurse basics +--------------- + +Invocation +~~~~~~~~~~ + +[[invocation_commandline]] +Command line arguments +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +`calcurse` takes the following options from the command line (both short and +long options are supported): + +`-a, --appointment`:: + Print the appointments and events for the current day and exit. The calendar + from which to read the appointments can be specified using the `-c` flag. + +`-c <file>, --calendar <file>`:: + Specify the calendar file to use. The default calendar is + `~/.calcurse/apts` (see section <<basics_files,calcurse files>>). + +`-d <date|num>, --day <date|num>`:: + Print the appointments for the given date or for the given number of + upcoming days, depending on the argument format. Two possible formats are + supported: ++ +-- + * a date (possible formats described below). + * a number `n`. +-- ++ +In the first case, the appointment list for the specified date will be +returned, while in the second case the appointment list for the `n` upcoming +days will be returned. As an example, typing `calcurse -d 3` will display +your appointments for today, tomorrow, and the day after tomorrow. Possible +formats for specifying the date are defined inside the general configuration +menu (see <<options_general,General options>>), using the +`input_datefmt` variable. ++ +Note: as for the `-a` flag, the calendar from which to read the appointments +can be specified using the `-c` flag. + +`-D <dir>, --directory <dir>`:: + Specify the data directory to use. This option is incompatible with -c. + If not specified, the default directory is `~/.calcurse/`. + +`-h, --help`:: + Print a short help text describing the supported command-line options, + and exit. + +`-i <file>, --import <file>`:: + Import the icalendar data contained in `file`. + +`-n, --next`:: + Print the next appointment within upcoming 24 hours and exit. The indicated + time is the number of hours and minutes left before this appointment. ++ +Note: the calendar from which to read the appointments can be specified using +the `-c` flag. + +`-N, --note`:: + When used with the `-a` or `-t` flag, also print note content if one is + associated with the displayed item. + +`-r[num], --range[=num]`:: + Print events and appointments for the num number of days and exit. If no num + is given, a range of 1 day is considered. + +`-s[date], --startday[=date]`:: + Print events and appointments from date and exit. If no date is given, the + current day is considered. + +`-S<regex>, --search=<regex>`:: + When used with the `-a`, `-d`, `-r`, `-s`, or `-t` flag, print only the items + having a description that matches the given regular expression. + +`--status`:: + Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If calcurse is + running, this will tell if the interactive mode was launched or if + calcurse is running in background. The process pid will also be indicated. + +`-t[num], --todo[=num]`:: + Print the `todo` list and exit. If the optional number `num` is given, then + only todos having a priority equal to `num` will be returned. The priority + number must be between 1 (highest) and 9 (lowest). It is also possible to + specify `0` for the priority, in which case only completed tasks will be + shown. + +`-v, --version`:: + Display `calcurse` version and exit. + +`-x[format], --export[=format]`:: + Export user data to specified format. Events, appointments and todos are + converted and echoed to stdout. Two possible formats are available: ical and + pcal (see section <<links_others,Links>> below). If the optional + argument `format` is not given, ical format is selected by default. ++ +Note: redirect standard output to export data to a file, by issuing a command +such as: ++ +---- +$ calcurse --export > my_data.dat +---- + +Environment variable for i18n +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +`calcurse` can be compiled with native language support (see +<<install_requirements_gettext,gettext library>>). Thus, if you wish to have +messages displayed into your native language, first make sure it is available +by looking at the `po/LINGUAS` file. This file indicates the set of available +languages by showing the two-letters corresponding code (for exemple, *fr* +stands for french). If you do not find your language, it would be greatly +appreciated if you could help translating `calcurse` (see the <<contribute,How +to contribute?>> section). + +If your language is available, run `calcurse` with the following command: + +---- +$ LC_ALL=fr_FR calcurse +---- + +... where *fr_FR* is the locale name in this exemple, but should be replaced by +the locale corresponding to the desired language. + +You should also specify the charset to be used, because in some cases the +accents and such are not displayed correctly. This charset is indicated at the +beginning of the po file corresponding to the desired language. For instance, +you can see in the fr.po file that it uses the iso-8859-1 charset, so you could +run `calcurse` using the following command: + +---- +$ LC_ALL=fr_FR.ISO8859-1 calcurse +---- + +Other environment variables +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The following environment variables affect the way `calcurse` operates: + +`VISUAL`:: + Specifies the external editor to use for writing notes. + +`EDITOR`:: + If the `VISUAL` environment variable is not set, then `EDITOR` will be used + as the default external editor. If none of those variables are set, then + `/usr/bin/vi` is used instead. + +`PAGER`:: + Specifies the default viewer to be used for reading notes. If this variable + is not set, then `/usr/bin/less` is used. + +User interface +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Non-interactive mode +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +When called with at least one of the following arguments: `-a`, `-d`, `-h`, +`-n`, `-t`, `-v`, `-x`, `calcurse` is started in non-interactive mode. This +means the desired information will be displayed, and after that, `calcurse` +simply quits and you are driven back to the shell prompt. + +That way, one can add a line such as `calcurse --todo --appointment` in its +init config file to display at logon the list of tasks and appointments +scheduled for the current day. + +[[basics_interface_interactive]] +Interactive mode +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +NOTE: Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to the default + ones, defined when `calcurse` is launched for the first time. If those + key bindings do not suit user's needs, it is possible to change them + within the keys configuration menu (see <<options_keys,key bindings>>). + +When called without any argument or only with the `-c` option, `calcurse` is +started in interactive mode. In this mode, you are shown an interface +containing three different panels which you can browse using the `TAB` key, +plus a notification bar and a status bar (see figure below). + +---- + appointment panel---. .---calendar panel + | | + v v + +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ + | Appointments || Calendar | + |------------------------------------||----------------------------| + | (|) April 6, 2006 || April 2006 | + | ||Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | + | || 1 2 | + | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | + | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | + | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | + | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | + | || | + | |+----------------------------+ + | |+----------------------------+ + | || ToDo | todo + | ||----------------------------| panel + | || | | + | || | | + | || |<--. + | || | + +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ + |---[ Mon 2006-11-22 | 10:11:43 ]---(apts)----> 01:20 :: lunch <---|<--. + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ notify-bar + | ? Help R Redraw H/L -/+1 Day G GoTo C Config | + | Q Quit S Save J/K -/+1 Week Tab Chg View |<-. + +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | + | + status bar +---- + +The first panel represents a calendar which allows to highlight a particular +day, the second one contains the list of the events and appointments on that +day, and the last one contains a list of tasks to do but which are not assigned +to any specific day. + +Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display a monthly +(default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. The weekly view would +look like the following: + +---- ++------------------------------------+ +| Calendar | +|----------------------------(# 13)--| +| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | +| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | +| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM +| -- -- -- -- -- -- | +| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM +| -- -- -- -- -- -- | +| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM +| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday +| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM +| -- -- -- -- -- -- | +| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM +| -- -- -- -- -- -- | +| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM ++------------------------------------+ +---- + +The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel (*# 13* +meaning it is the 13th week of the year in the above example). The seven days +of the current week are displayed in column. Each day is divided into slices of +4 hours each (6 slices in total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a +different color if an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. + +In the appointment panel, one can notice the *`(|)`* sign just in front of the +date. This indicates the current phase of the moon. Depending on which is the +current phase, the following signs can be seen: + +` |) `:: + first quarter + +` (|) `:: + full moon + +` (| `:: + last quarter + +` | `:: + new moon + +no sign:: + Phase of the moon does not correspond to any of the above ones. + +At the very bottom of the screen there is a status bar, which indicates the +possible actions and the corresponding keystrokes. + +Just above this status bar is the notify-bar, which indicates from left to +right : the current date, the current time, the calendar file currently in use +(apts on the above example, which is the default calendar file, see the +following section), and the next appointment within the upcoming 24 hours. Here +it says that it will be lunch time in one hour and twenty minutes. + +NOTE: Some actions, such as editing or adding an item, require to type in some + text. This is done with the help of the built-in input line editor. + +Within this editor, if a line is longer than the screen width, a `>`, `*`, or +`<` character is displayed in the last column indicating that there are more +character after, before and after, or before the current position, +respectively. The line is scrolled horizontally as necessary. + +Moreover, some editing commands are bound to particular control characters. +Hereafter are indicated the available editing commands (`^` stands for the +control key): + +`^a`:: + moves the cursor to the beginning of the input line + +`^b`:: + moves the cursor backward + +`^d`:: + deletes one character forward + +`^e`:: + moves the cursor to the end of the input line + +`^f`:: + moves the cursor forward + +`^h`:: + deletes one character backward + +`^k`:: + deletes the input from the cursor to the end of the line + +`ESCAPE`:: + cancels the editing + +[[basics_daemon]] +Background mode +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu (see +<<options_notify,Notify-bar settings>>), `calcurse` will stay in background +when the user interface is not running. In background mode, `calcurse` checks +for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined notification command when + necessary. When the user interface is started again, the daemon automatically + stops. + +`calcurse` background activity can be logged (set the `notify-daemon_log` +variable in the notification configuration <<options_notify,menu>>), +and in that case, information about the daemon start and stop time, reminders' +command launch time, signals received... will be written in the `daemon.log` +file (see section <<basics_files,files>>). + +Using the `--status` command line option (see section +<<basics_invocation_commandline,Command line arguments>>), one can know if +`calcurse` is currently running in background or not. If the daemon is +running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of the +daemon process will be shown): + +---- +calcurse is running in background (pid 14536) +---- + +NOTE: To stop the daemon, just send the `TERM` signal to it, using a command + such as: `kill daemon_pid`, where *daemon_pid* is the process id of the + daemon (14536 in the above example). + +[[basics_files]] +calcurse files +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The following structure is created in your `$HOME` directory (or in the +directory you specified with the -D option) the first time `calcurse` is run +: + +---- +$HOME/.calcurse/ + |___notes/ + |___conf + |___keys + |___apts + |___todo +---- +`notes/`:: + this subdirectory contains descriptions of the notes which are attached to + appointments, events or todos. One text file is created per note, whose name + is built using mkstemp(3) and should be unique, but with no relation with the + corresponding item's description. +`conf`:: + this file contains the user configuration +`keys`:: + this file contains the user-defined key bindings +`apts`:: + this file contains all of the events and user's appointments +`todo`:: + this file contains the todo list + +NOTE: If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification + configuration menu, the extra file `daemon.log` will appear in calcurse + data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity when + running in background. + +Import/Export capabilities +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The import and export capabilities offered by `calcurse` are described below. + +Import +^^^^^^ + +Data in icalendar format as described in the rfc2445 specification (see +<<links_others,links>> section below) can be imported into calcurse. Calcurse +ical parser is based on version 2.0 of this specification, but for now on, only +a subset of it is supported. + +The following icalendar properties are handled by calcurse: + +* `VTODO` items: "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION" + +* `VEVENT` items: "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", + "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION" + +The icalendar `DESCRIPTION` property will be converted into calcurse format by +adding a note to the item. If a "VALARM" property is found, the item will be +flagged as important and the user will get a notification (this is only +applicable to appointments). + +Here are the properties that are not implemented: + +* negative time durations are not taken into account (item is skipped) + +* some recurence frequences are not recognize: "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / + "HOURLY" + +* some recurrence keywords are not recognized (all those starting with `BY`): + "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY" / "BYYEARDAY" / + "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS" plus "WKST" + +* the recurrence exception keyword "EXRULE" is not recognized + +* timezones are not taken into account + +Export +^^^^^^ + +Two possible export formats are available: `ical` and `pcal` (see section +<<links_others,Links>> below to find out about those formats). + +Online help +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +At any time, the built-in help system can be invoked by pressing the `?` +key. Once viewing the help screens, informations on a specific command can be +accessed by pressing the keystroke corresponding to that command. + +Options +------- + +All of the `calcurse` parameters are configurable from the Configuration menu +available when pressing `C`. You are then driven to a submenu with five +possible choices : pressing `C` again will lead you to the Color scheme +configuration, pressing `L` allows you to choose the layout of the main +`calcurse` screen (in other words, where to put the three different panels on +screen), pressing `G` permits you to choose between different general options, +pressing `K` opens the key bindings configuration menu, and last you can modify +the notify-bar settings by pressing `N`. + +[[options_general]] +General options +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +These options control `calcurse` general behavior, as described below: + +`auto_save` (default: *yes*):: + This option allows to automatically save the user's data (if set to *yes*) + when quitting. <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">warning:</span> No data + will be automatically saved if `auto_save` is set to *no*. This means the + user must press `S` (for saving) in order to retrieve its modifications. + +`periodic_save` (default: *0*):: + If different from `0`, user's data will be automatically saved every + *periodic_save* minutes. When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks + (i.e. `**`) will appear on the top right-hand side of the screen). + +`confirm_quit` (default: *yes*):: + If set to *yes*, confirmation is required before quitting, otherwise pressing + `Q` will cause `calcurse` to quit without prompting for user confirmation. + +`confirm_delete` (default: *yes*):: + If this option is set to *yes*, pressing `D` for deleting an item (either a + *todo*, *appointment*, or *event*), will lead to a prompt asking for user + confirmation before removing the selected item from the list. Otherwise, no + confirmation will be needed before deleting the item. + +`skip_system_dialogs` (default: *no*):: + Setting this option to *yes* will result in skipping the system dialogs + related to the saving and loading of data. This can be useful to speed up + the input/output processes. + +`skip_progress_bar` (default: *no*):: + If set to *yes*, this will cause the disappearing of the progress bar which + is usually shown when saving data to file. If set to *no*, this bar will be + displayed, together with the name of the file being saved (see section + <<basics_files,calcurse files>>). + +`calendar_default_view` (default: *0*):: + If set to `0`, the monthly calendar view will be displayed by default + otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed. + +`week_begins_on_monday` (default: *yes*):: + One can choose between Monday and Sunday as the first day of the week. If the + option `week_begins_on_monday` is set to *yes*, Monday will be first in the + calendar view. Else if the option is set to *no*, then Sunday will be the + first day of the week. + +`output_datefmt` (default: *%D*):: + This option indicates the format to be used when displaying dates in + non-interactive mode. Using the default values, dates are displayed the + following way: *mm/dd/aa*. You can see all of the possible formats by typing + `man 3 strftime` inside a terminal. + +`input_datefmt` (default: *1*):: + This option indicates the format that will be used to enter dates in + *calcurse*. Four choices are available: ++ +1. mm/dd/yyyy +2. dd/mm/yyyy +3. yyyy/mm/dd +4. yyyy-mm-dd + +[[options_keys]] +Key bindings +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +One can define it's own keybindings within the `Keys` configuration menu. The +default keys look like the one used by the `vim` editor, especially the +displacement keys. Anyway, within this configuration menu, users can redefine +all of the keys available from within calcurse's user interface. + +To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will apply. +Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new one. You will +then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new binding. It is possible +to define more than one key binding for a single action. + +An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding is not already +set for another action. In that case, you will be asked to choose a different +one. Another check is done when exiting from this menu, to make sure all +possible actions have a key associated with it. + +The following keys can be used to define bindings: + +* lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as `a`, `Z`, `0` + +* CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters + +* escape, horizontal tab, and space keys + +* arrow keys (up, down, left, and right) + +* `HOME` and `END` keys + +While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for each +one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the highlighted +action is used for. + +Color themes +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +`calcurse` color theme can be customized to suit user's needs. To change the +default theme, the configuration page displays possible choices for foreground +and background colors. Using arrows or calcurse displacement keys to move, and +`X` or space to select a color, user can preview the theme which will be +applied. It is possible to keep the terminal's default colors by selecting the +corresponding choice in the list. + +The chosen color theme will then be applied to the panel borders, to the +titles, to the keystrokes, and to general informations displayed inside status +bar. A black and white theme is also available, in order to support non-color +terminals. + +NOTE: Depending on your terminal type and on the value of the `$TERM` + environnement variable, color could or could not be supported. An error + message will appear if you try to change colors whereas your terminal + does not support this feature. If you do know your terminal supports + colors but could not get `calcurse` to display them, try to set your + `$TERM` variable to another value (such as *xterm-xfree86* for instance). + +Layout configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The layout corresponds to the position of the panels inside `calcurse` screen. +The default layout makes the calendar panel to be displayed on the top-right +corner of the terminal, the todo panel on the bottom-right corner, while the +appointment panel is displayed on the left hand-side of the screen (see the +figure in section <<basics_interface_interactive,Interactive mode>> for an +exemple of the default layout). By choosing another layout in the +configuration screen, user can customize `calcurse` appearence to best suit his +needs by placing the different panels where needed. + +The following option is used to modify the layout configuration: + +`layout` (default: *0*):: + Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout configuration + screen for the description of the available layouts). + +Sidebar configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: the calendar +and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo list or the appointment +list. + +The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar: + +`side-bar_width` (default: *0*):: + Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar. + +[[options_notify]] +Notify-bar settings +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The following options are used to modify the notify-bar behavior: + +`notify-bar_show` (default: *yes*):: + This option indicates if you want the notify-bar to be displayed or not. + +`notify-bar_date` (default: *%a %F*):: + With this option, you can specify the format to be used to display the + current date inside the notification bar. You can see all of the possible + formats by typing `man 3 strftime` inside a terminal. + +`notify-bar_time` (default: *%T*):: + With this option, you can specify the format to be used to display the + current time inside the notification bar. You can see all of the possible + formats by typing `man 3 strftime` inside a terminal. + +`notify-bar_warning` (default: *300*):: + When there is an appointment which is flagged as `important` within the next + `notify-bar_warning` seconds, the display of that appointment inside the + notify-bar starts to blink. Moreover, the command defined by the + `notify-bar_command` option will be launched. That way, the user is warned + and knows there will be soon an upcoming appointment. + +`notify-bar_command` (default: *printf '\a'*):: + This option indicates which command is to be launched when there is an + upcoming appointment flagged as `important`. This command will be passed to + the user's shell which will interpret it. To know what shell must be used, + the content of the `$SHELL` environment variable is used. If this variable is + not set, `/bin/sh` is used instead. ++ +==== +Say the `mail` command is available on the user's system, one can use the +following command to get notified by mail of an upcoming appointment (the +appointment description will also be mentioned in the mail body): + +---- +$ calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] upcoming appointment!" user@host.com +---- +==== + +`notify-daemon_enable` (default: *no*):: + If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning `calcurse` will run into + background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the + notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More + details can be found in section <<basics_daemon,Background mode>>. + +`notify-daemon_log` (default: *no*):: + If set to yes, `calcurse` daemon activity will be logged (see section + <<basics_files,files>>). + +Known bugs +---------- + +Incorrect highlighting of items appear when using calcurse black and white +theme together with a `$TERM` variable set to *xterm-color*. To fix this bug, +and as advised by Thomas E. Dickey (`xterm` maintainer), *xterm-xfree86* should +be used instead of *xterm-color* to set the `$TERM` variable: + +____ +"The xterm-color value for $TERM is a bad choice for XFree86 xterm because it +is commonly used for a terminfo entry which happens to not support bce. Use the +xterm-xfree86 entry which is distributed with XFree86 xterm (or the similar one +distributed with ncurses)." +____ + +[[bugs]] +Reporting bugs and feedback +--------------------------- + +Please send bug reports and feedback to: `calcurse .at. culot .dot. org` or to +the author: `frederic .at. culot .dot. org`. + +[[contribute]] +How to contribute? +------------------ + +If you would like to contribute to the project, you can first send your +feedback on what you like or dislike, and if there are features you miss in +`calcurse`. For now on, possible contributions concern the translation of +`calcurse` messages and documentation. + +NOTE: any help in getting `calcurse` internationalized would be very welcomed, + but before contributing, send a mail to `calcurse-i18n .at. culot .dot. + org` to know if someone already started the translation process into your + language. + +Translating documentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The *doc/* directory of the source package already contains translated version +of `calcurse` manual. However, if the manual is not yet available into your +native language, it would be appreciated if you could help translating it. + +To do so, just copy one of the existing manual file to `manual_XX.html`, where +*XX* identifies your language. Then translate this newly created file and send +it to the author (see <<bugs,Reporting bugs and feeback>>), so that it can be +included in the next `calcurse` release. + +calcurse i18n +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +As already mentioned, `gettext` utilities are used by `calcurse` to produce +multi-lingual messages. This section provides informations about how to +translate those messages into your native language. However, this howto is +deliberately incomplete, focusing on working with `gettext` for `calcurse` +specifically. For more comprehensive informations or to grasp the Big Picture +of Native Language Support, you should refer to the `GNU gettext` manual at: +http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/ + +Basically, three different people get involved in the translation chain: +coders, language coordinator, and translators. After a quick overview of how +things work, the translator tasks will be described hereafter. + +Overview +^^^^^^^^ + +To be able to display texts in the native language of the user, two steps are +required: *internationalization* (i18n) and *localization* (l10n). + +i18n is about making `calcurse` support multiple languages. It is performed by +coders, who will mark translatable texts and provide a way to display them +translated at runtime. + +l10n is about making the i18n'ed `calcurse` adapt to the specific language of +the user, ie translating the strings previously marked by the developers, and +setting the environment correctly for `calcurse` to use the result of this +translation. + +So, translatable strings are first marked by the coders within the `C` source +files, then gathered in a template file (*calcurse.pot* - the *pot* extension +meaning *portable object template*). The content of this template file is then +merged with the translation files for each language (*fr.po* for french, for +instance - with *po* standing for *portable object*, ie meant to be read and +edited by humans). A given translation team will take this file, translate its +strings, and send it back to the developers. At compilation time, a binary +version of this file (for efficiency reasons) will be produced (*fr.mo* - *mo* +stands for *machine object*, ie meant to be read by programs), and then +installed. Then `calcurse` will use this file at runtime, translating the +strings according to the locale settings of the user. + + +Translator tasks +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Suppose someone wants to initiate the translation of a new language. Here are +the steps to follow: + +* First, find out what the locale name is. For instance, for french, it is + `fr_FR`, or simply `fr`. This is the value the user will have to put in his + `LC_ALL` environment variable for software to be translated (see + <<basics_invocation_variable,Environment variable for i18n>>). + +* Then, go into the *po/* directory, and create a new po-file + from the template file using the following command: `msginit -i calcurse.pot + -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator` If you do not have `msginit` installed on + your system, simply copy the *calcurse.pot* file to *fr.po* and edit the + header by hand. + +Now, having this *fr.po* file, the translator is ready to begin. + +po-files +^^^^^^^^ + +The format of the po-files is quite simple. Indeed, po-files are made of four +things: + +1. *location lines:* tells you where the strings can be seen (name of file and + line number), in case you need to see a bit of context. + +2. *msgid lines:* the strings to translate. + +3. *msgstr lines:* the translated strings. + +4. *lines prefixed with `#`:* comments (some with a special meaning, as we will + see below). + +Basically, all you have to do is fill the *msgstr* lines with the translation +of the above *msgid* line. + +A few notes: + +*Fuzzy strings*:: + You will meet strings marked with a `"#, fuzzy"` comment. `calcurse` won't + use the translations of such strings until you do something about them. A + string being fuzzy means either that the string has already been translated + but has since been changed in the sources of the program, or that this is a + new string for which `gettext` made a 'wild guess' for the translation, based + on other strings in the file. It means you have to review the translation. + Sometimes, the original string has changed just because a typo has been + fixed. In this case, you won't have to change anything. But sometimes, the + translation will no longer be accurate and needs to be changed. Once you are + done and happy with the translation, just remove the `"#, fuzzy"` line, and + the translation will be used again in `calcurse`. + +*c-format strings and special sequences*:: + Some strings have the following comment: `"#, c-format"`. This tells that + parts of the string to translate have a special meaning for the program, and + that you should leave them alone. For instance, %-sequences, like `"%s"`. + These means that `calcurse` will replace them with another string. So it is + important it remains. There are also \-sequences, like `\n` or `\t`. Leave + them, too. The former represents an end of line, the latter a tabulation. + +*Translations can be wrapped*:: + If lines are too long, you can just break them like this: ++ +---- +msgid "" +"some very long line" +"another line" +---- + +*po-file header*:: + At the very beginning of the po-file, the first string form a header, where + various kind of information has to be filled in. Most important one is the + charset. It should resemble ++ +---- +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" +---- ++ +You should also fill in the Last-Translator field, so that potential +contributors can contact you if they want to join you in the translation team, +or have remarks/typo fixes to give about the translations. You can either just +give your name/nick, or add an email address, for exemple: ++ +---- +"Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" +---- + +*Comments*:: + Adding comments (lines begining with the `#` character) can be a good way to + point out problems or translation difficulties to proofreaders or other + members of your team. + +*Strings size*:: + `calcurse` is a curses/console program, thus it can be heavily dependant on + the terminal size (number of columns). You should think about this when + translating. Often, a string must fit into a single line (standard length is + 80 characters). Don't translate blindly, try to look where your string will + be displayed to adapt your translation. + +*A few useful tools*:: + The po-file format is very simple, and the file can be edited with a standard + text editor. But if you prefer, there are few specialized tools you may find + convenient for translating: ++ +* `poEdit` (http://www.poedit.org/) +* `KBabel` (http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/) +* `GTranslator` (http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/) +* `Emacs` po mode +* `Vim` po mode + +*And finally*:: + I hope you'll have fun contributing to a more internationalized world. :) If + you have any more questions, don't hesitate to contact me at *frederic .at. + culot .dot. org*. + +Links +----- + +This section contains links and references that may be of interest to you. + +calcurse homepage +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The `calcurse` homepage can be found at http://culot.org/calcurse + +calcurse announce list +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +If you are interested in the project and want to be warned when a new release +comes out, you can subscribe to the `calcurse` announce list. In doing so, you +will receive an email as soon as a new feature appears in `calcurse`. + +To subscribe to this list, send a message to *calcurse-announce .at. culot +.dot. org* with "subscribe" in the subject field. + +calcurse RSS feed +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Another possibility to get warned when new releases come out is to follow the +RSS feed at: http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml + +This RSS feed is updated each time a new version of calcurse is available, +describing newly added features. + +[[links_others]] +Other links +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +You may want to look at the ical format specification (rfc2445) at: +http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445 + +The pcal project page can be found at: http://pcal.sourceforge.net/ + +Thanks +------ + +Its time now to thank other people without whom this program would not exist! +So here is a list of contributing persons I would like to thank : + +* Alex for its patches, help and advices with `C` programming + +* Gwen for testing and general discussions about how to improve `calcurse` + +* Herbert for packaging `calcurse` for FreeBSD + +* Zul for packaging `calcurse` for NetBSD + +* Wain, Steffen and Ronald for packaging `calcurse` for Archlinux + +* Kevin, Ryan, and fEnIo for packaging `calcurse` for Debian and Ubuntu + +* Pascal for packaging `calcurse` for Slackware + +* Alexandre and Markus for packaging `calcurse` for Mac OsX and Darwin + +* Igor for packaging `calcurse` for ALT Linux + +* Joel for its calendar script which inspired `calcurse` calendar view + +* Michael Schulz and Chris M. for the german translation of `calcurse` and its + manual + +* Jose Lopez for the spanish translation of `calcurse` and its manual + +* Neil Williams for the english translation + +* Leandro Noferini for the italian translation + +* Tony for its patch which helped improving the recur_item_inday() function, + and for implementing the date format configuration options + +* Jeremy Roon for the dutch translation + +* Erik Saule for its patch implementing the `-N`, `-s`, `-S`, `-r` and `-D` + flags + +* people who write softwares I like and which inspired me, especially : + + - `vim` for the displacement keys + - `orpheus` and `abook` for documentation + - `pine` and `aptitude` for the text user interface + - `tmux` for coding style + +And last, many many thanks to all of the `calcurse` users who sent me their +feedback. diff --git a/doc/manual_de.html b/doc/manual_de.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2957acf..0000000 --- a/doc/manual_de.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1327 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<!-- -/* - * $calcurse: manual_de.html,v 1.28 2010/03/29 18:18:01 culot Exp $ - * - * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - */ ---> - -<html> -<head> -<title>CALCURSE documentation</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> -<style type="text/css" media="all"> - @import url(manual.css); -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div id="mainContent"> - -<h1 id="title"> -<span class="main">CALCURSE - textbasierter Terminkalender</span></h1> - -<div class="warn"> -<div class="todo"> -<h1>Abstract</h1> This manual describes <code>calcurse</code> functionnalities, -and how to use them. The installation from source is first described, together -with the available command line arguments. The user interface -is then presented, with all of the customizable options that change -<code>calcurse</code> behavior. Last, bug reporting procedure is explained, as -well as the way one can contribute to <code>calcurse</code> development. -</div> -</div> - -<div id="toc"> -<h1>Inhaltsverzeichnis</h1> -<ul> - <li><a href="#intro">1. Einleitung</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview">2. Überblick</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#overview_history">2.1 Anlass</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview_features">2.2 Wichtige Eigenschaften</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install">3. Installation</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements">3.1 Voraussetzungen</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_ncurses">3.1.1 <code>ncurses</code> Bibliothek</a></li> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_gettext">3.1.2 <code>gettext</code> Bibliothek</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install_process">3.2 Installationsprozess</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics">4. <code>calcurse</code> Grundlagen</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation">4.1 Programmaufruf</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">4.1.1 Programmargumente</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_variable">4.1.2 Umgebungsvariable für i18n</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_environment"><span class="todo">4.1.3 Other environment - variables</span></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface">4.2 Benutzer-Interface</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_noninteractive">4.2.1 Nicht-interaktiver Modus</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_interactive">4.2.2 Interaktiver Modus</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_daemon"><span class="todo">4.3 Background mode</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_files">4.4 <code>calcurse</code> Dateien</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_import_export"><span class="todo">4.5 Import/Export capabilities</span></a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_import"><span class="todo">4.5.1 Import</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_export"><span class="todo">4.5.2 Export</span></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_help">4.6 Onlinehilfe</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#options">5. Optionen</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#options_general">5.1 Allgemeine Optionen</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_keys"><span class="todo">5.2 Key bindings</span></a> - <li><a href="#options_colors">5.3 Einstellen der Terminalfarben</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_layout">5.4 Einstellen des Layouts</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_sidebar"><span class="todo">5.5 Sidebar configuration</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#options_notify">5.6 Einstellen der Benachrichtigungszeile</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#known_bugs">6. Bekannte Fehler</a></li> - <li><a href="#bugs">7. Mitteilung von Fehlern und Anregungen</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute">8. Wie kann ich einen Beitrag leisten?</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_documentation">8.1 Übersetzung der Dokumentation</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n">8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_overview">8.2.1 Überblick</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_translator">8.2.2 Aufgaben des Übersetzers</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_po-files">8.2.3 po-Dateien</a></li> - </ul></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#links">9. Links</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#links_homepage">9.1 <code>calcurse</code> Internetseite</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_list">9.2 <code>calcurse</code> Ankündigungsliste</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_rss">9.3 <code>calcurse</code> RSS</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_others"><div class="todo">9.4 Other links</div></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#thanks">10. Danksagungen</a></li> -</ul> -</div> - - -<h1>1. Einleitung<a name="intro"></a></h1> -<p> -<code>calcurse</code> ist ein -textbasierender Kalender, der Ihnen bei der Organisation von -Ereignissen, Terminen und täglichen Aufgaben hilft. Ein -konfigurierbares Notitzsystem erinnert Benutzer an bevorstehende -Termine. Die curses basierende Benutzeroberflache kann auf eigene die -Bedürfnisse angepaßt werden. Alle Programmbefehle sind in -einem online Hilfesystem dokumentiert. -</p> - -<h1>2. Überblick<a name="overview"></a></h1> -<h2>2.1 Anlass<a name="overview_history"></a></h2> -<p> -Nachdem ich mein Diplom in Astrophysik absolviert hatte, kam mir die -Idee dieses Programm zu schreiben. Alles begann etwas unorganisiert zu -werden. Ein Programm, dass mir bei meiner Terminplanung etwas hilft, -war wirklich vonnöten. ;) -</p> -<p> -Ich mag Programme mit Textinterfaces, weil sie einfach, schnell, -portabel und effizient sind. Also dachte ich darüber nach ein -Programm mit textorientiertem Benutzer-Interface zu entwickeln. -Darüber hinaus wollte ich meine Kenntnisse in der Programmiersprache -<code>C</code> erweitern. Im Grundstudium kam ich mit <code>C</code> -erstmals in Kontakt. Ich denke es ist eine gute Idee ein solches -Projekt zu beginnen und dabei meine Kenntnisse in <code>C</code> zu -erweitern! -</p> -<p> -Mein Diplom habe ich nun absolviert, <code>calcurse</code> -ist aber noch immer nicht fertig. Nach wie vor entwickle ich dieses -Programm weiter, in der Hoffnung, dass es für andere von Nutzen sein -wird. Also hier ist es... -</p> -<p> -Doch warum nenne ich es 'calcurse'? Nun, es ist einfach -zusammengesetzt aus den Wörtern 'CALendar' und 'nCurses', dem Namen -der Bibliothek die für das Benutzer-Interface verwendet wird. -</p> - -<h2>2.2 Wichtige Eigenschaften<a name="overview_features"></a></h2> -<p> -<code>Calcurse</code> ist portabel und setzt sich zum Ziel klein, -schnell und sicher zu sein. Es ist auf einer Konsole oder einem -Terminal zu verwenden, entweder lokal oder auf einem entfernten System -mithilfe einer ssh-Verbindung (oder Ähnlichem). -</p> -<p> -<code>Calcurse</code> kann in zwei unterschiedlichen Modi gestartet -werden: Im interaktiven und im nicht-interaktiven Modus. Der erste Modus -erzeugt Dank des textbasierten Interfaces die Ansicht eines eigenen -persönlichen Terminkalenders. Mit dem zweiten Modus ist es möglich -sich ein Erinnerungstool (Reminder) zu erstellen, wenn -<code>calcurse</code> mit den entsprechenden Argumenten in 'cron tab' -oder einem 'init script' eingebunden wird. -</p> -<p> -Darüber hinaus ist <code>calcurse</code> für Benutzer erstellt worden, -mit der Absicht so benutzerfreundlich wie möglich zu sein. Das -bedeutet, dass eine komplette Onlinehilfe im Programm zu Verfügung -steht, sowie alle mögliche Aktionen jederzeit in einer Statuszeile -ersichtlich sind. Das Benutzer-Interface ist ebenfalls -einstellbar. Ebenso kann man verschiedene Textfarben und Layouts -wählen. -<span class="todo">Key bindings are also configurable, to fit everyone's needs.</span> -Ein konfigurierbares Notizsystem erinnert den Benutzer -an bevorstehende Termine. -<span class="todo">The reminders are sent even if the user's interface -is not running, as calcurse is able to run in background.</span> -</p> - -<h1>3. Installation<a name="install"></a></h1> -<h2>3.1 Voraussetzungen<a name="install_requirements"></a></h2> -<h3>3.1.1 <code>ncurses</code> Bibliothek<a name="install_requirements_ncurses"></a></h3> -<p> -<code>Calcurse</code> benötigt einen C-Compiler wie etwa -<code>cc</code> oder <code>gcc</code>. Ferner wird die -ncurses-Bibliothek benötigt, die jedoch auf den meisten Unix-Systemen -verfügbar sein sollte. Falls nicht, können Sie sie von folgender URL herunter -laden:</p> -<pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/</pre> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - It is also possible to link <code>calcurse</code> against the - <code>ncursesw</code> library (ncurses with support for unicode). - However, UTF-8 is not yet supported by <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -</div> - -<h3>3.1.2 <code>gettext</code> Bibliothek<a name="install_requirements_gettext"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> unterstützt die Internationalisierung - (künftig <span class="emp">i18n</span>) durch <code>gettext</code>. - Das bedeutet, dass <code>calcurse</code> mehrsprachige Mitteilungen - erzeugen kann, wenn es mit der entsprechenden Sprachunterstützung - kompiliert wurde (z.B. <span class="emp">NLS</span>). -</p> -<p> - Dennoch, <span class="emp">NLS</span> ist optional und wenn keine mehrsprachigen Mitteilungen - gewünscht sind, kann diese Eigenschaft abgestellt werden. - Rufen Sie hierzu einfach das <code>configure</code> Skript mit der Option - <code>--disable-nls</code> auf (siehe Abschnitt <ahref="#install_process"> - Installationsprozess</a>). - Um zu überprüfen, ob <code>gettext</code> auf dem System installiert ist, - kann man nach der <code>libintl.h</code> Datei suchen:</p> - <pre>locate libintl.h</pre> -<p> - Wurde diese Datei nicht gefunden, kann <code>gettext</code> von folgender URL - herunter geladen werden:</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Beachte:</span> - Auch wenn <code>libintl.h</code> auf dem System - gefunden wurde, kann es erforderlich sein den Pfad dieser Datei während des - <ahref="#install_process"> Installationsprozesses</a> anzugeben. Die entsprechende - Option für das <code>configure</code> Skript lautet dann - <code>--with-libintl-prefix</code>. - Das <code>configure</code> Skript wird natürlich vorzeitig abbrechen, wenn die - dazugehörige Bibliothek nicht gefunden wurde.</p> - - -<h2>3.2 Installationsprozess<a name="install_process"></a></h2> -<p> -Als erstes müssen die Dateien entpackt werden:</p> -<pre>tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz</pre> -<p> -Ist diese Voraussetzung erfüllt und das Archiv entpackt, -sind nur noch die drei üblichen Schritte erforderlich:</p> - <ol> - <li><code>./configure</code></li> - <li><code>make</code></li> - <li><code>make install</code> (mit Root-Rechten)</li> - </ol> -<p> -Rufen Sie <code>./configure --help</code> auf, um die -verfügbaren Optionen aufgelistet zu bekommen. -</p> - -<h1>4. <code>calcurse</code> Grundlagen<a name="basics"></a></h1> -<h2>4.1 Programmaufruf<a name="basics_invocation"></a></h2> -<h3>4.1.1 Programmargumente<a name="basics_invocation_commandline"></a></h3> -<p> -<code>Calcurse</code> kann mit den folgenden Optionen aufgerufen werden. -Es werden sowohl kurze als auch lange Optionsangaben unterstützt.</p> - -<p> -<dl> - <dt><code>-a, --appointment</code></dt> - <dd>Gibt die Termine des heutigen Tags aus. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beachte:</span> - Die Kalender-Datei, aus der die Termine gelesen - werden sollen, kann mit mit Hilfe der '-c' Option angegeben werden.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-c <file>, --calendar <file></code></dt> - <dd>Gibt die zu lesende Kalender-Datei an. - Der Standardkalender ist <code>~/.calcurse/apts</code> (beachte auch - Abschnitt: <a href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> Dateien</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>-d <date|num>, --day <date|num></code></dt> - <dd>Gibt die Termine eines angegebenen Datums oder alle Termine der - anzugebenden nachfolgenden Tage aus. Somit sind zwei Formate möglich: - <ul> - <li>Datum: <span class="todo">(possible formats described below).</span></li> - <li>Anzahl der Tage: 'n'.</li> - </ul> - Im ersten Fall wird eine Liste mit allen Terminen des angegebenen - Datums ausgegeben. Der zweite Fall listet alle folgenden Termine auf, - die in den nächsten 'n' Tagen zu erledigen sind. - Beispiel: Die Eingabe <code>calcurse -d 3</code> gibt alle Termine des - heutigen und der beiden folgenden Tage aus. - <div class="todo"> - Possible formats for specifying the date are defined inside the - general configuration menu (see - <a href="#options_general">General options</a>), using the - <code>input_datefmt</code> variable. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> as for the '-a' - flag, the calendar from which to read the appointments - can be specified using the '-c' flag.</p> - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-D <dir>, --directory <dir></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Specify the data directory to use. This option is - incompatible with -c. If not specified, the - default directory is <code>'~/.calcurse/'</code>. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-h, --help</code></dt> - <dd>Gibt eine Hilfe zu den unterstützten Optionen aus. - </dd> - <dt><code>-i <file>, --import <file></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Import the icalendar data contained in <code>file</code>. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-n, --next</code></dt> - <dd>Gibt den Termin aus, der innerhalb der kommenden 24 Stunden als - nächstes stattfindet. - Die dargestellte Zeitangabe weist darauf hin, in wie viel Stunden - und Minuten der Termin beginnen wird. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beachte:</span> - Die Kalender-Datei, aus der die Termine gelesen - werden sollen, kann mit mit Hilfe der '-c' Option angegeben werden.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-N, --note</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a' or '-t' flag, also print note content - if one is associated with the displayed item. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-r[num], --range[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Print events and appointments for the num number of - days and exit. If no num is given, a range of 1 day - is considered. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-s[date], --startday[=date]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Print events and appointments from date and exit. - If no date is given, the current day is considered. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-S<regex>, --search=<regex></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a', '-d', '-r', '-s', or '-t' flag, - print only the items having a description that matches the given - regular expression. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>--status</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If - calcurse is running, this will tell if the interactive - mode was launched or if calcurse is running in background. - The process pid will also be indicated. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-t[num], --todo[=num]</code></dt> - <dd>Gibt die 'todo' Liste aus. - Wird die optionale Angabe <code>num</code> übergeben, werden nur diejenigen - Aufgaben angezeigt, denen die Prioriät <code>num</code> zugewiesen wurde.<br> - <div class="todo"> - The priority number must be between 1 (highest) and 9 (lowest). It is also possible - to specify '0' for the priority, in which case only completed tasks will be shown.</p> - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-v, --version</code></dt> - <dd>Gibt die aktuelle Version von Calcurse aus. - </dd> - <dt><code>-x[format], --export[=format]</code></dt> - <dd><div class="todo"> - Export user data to specified format. Events, appointments and - todos are converted and echoed to stdout. - Two possible formats are available: ical and pcal - (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below). - If the optional argument <code>format</code> is not given, - ical format is selected by default. - </div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beachte:</span> - leiten Sie die Ausgabe in eine Datei, etwa wie im folgenden Beispiel: - <code>$ calcurse --export > my_data.dat</code></p> - </dd> -</dl> - -<h3>4.1.2 Umgebungsvariable für i18n<a name="basics_invocation_variable"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> kann mit Unterstützung für verschiedene Sprachen - kompiliert werden (siehe <a - href="#install_requirements_gettext"><code>gettext</code> - Bibliothek</a>). Um Meldungen in anderen Sprachen zu erhalten, - sollte zunächst geprüft werden, ob die <code>po/LINGUAS</code> Datei verfügbar ist. - Diese Datei zeigt alle verfügbaren Sprachen durch - zweibuchstabige Kürzel an (beispielsweise steht <span class="emp">fr</span> - für Französisch). Ist Ihre Muttersprache nicht aufgeführt, wäre es - natürlich großartig, wenn Sie sich an der Übersetzung von <code>calcurse</code> - in andere Sprachen beteiligen könnten (siehe Abschnitt <a href="#contribute">Wie kann - ich einen Beitrag leisten?</a>).</p> -<p> - Wird Ihre Sprache bereits unterstützt, können Sie - <code>calcurse</code> mit dem folgenden Aufruf starten:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR calcurse</pre> -<p> - wobei <span class="emp">fr_FR</span> der Name der gewünschten Spracheausgabe ist und durch - das Kürzel Ihrer Sprache ersetzt werden kann.</p> -<p> - Zusätzlich sollten Sie den verwendeten Zeichensatz angeben, da in einigen Fällen - Sonderzeichen wie etwa Akzente und Umlaute nicht korrekt dargestellt werden. - Auf den der entsprechende Sprache gewünschten Zeichensatz wird am Anfang der po-Datei - hingewiesen. Der Datei fr.po können Sie beispielsweise entnehmen, dass der Zeichensatz - iso-8859-1 verwendet wird. Sie könnten <code>calcurse</code> folgendermaßen - aufrufen:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR.ISO8859-1 calcurse</pre> - -<div class="todo"> -<h3>4.1.3 Other environment variables<a name="basics_invocation_environment"></a></h3> -<p> - The following environment variables affect the way <code>calcurse</code> - operates:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>VISUAL</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies the external editor to use for writing notes. - </dd> - <dt><code>EDITOR</code></dt> - <dd>If the <code>VISUAL</code> environment variable - is not set, then <code>EDITOR</code> will be used as - the default external editor. If none of those variables are set, - then <code>/usr/bin/vi</code> is used instead. - </dd> - <dt><code>PAGER</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies the default viewer to be used for reading notes. - If this variable is not set, then <code>/usr/bin/less</code> is used. - </dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<h2>4.2 Benutzer-Interface<a name="basics_interface"></a></h2> -<h3>4.2.1 Nicht interaktiver Modus<a name="basics_interface_noninteractive"></a></h3> -<p> -Wird <code>calcurse</code> mit den Optionen: -<code>-a</code>, <code>-d</code>, <code>-h</code>, -<code>-n</code>, <code>-t</code>, <code>-v</code>, <code>-x</code> -gestartet, wird das Programm im nicht-interaktiven Modus -ausgeführt. Das bedeutet, dass die gewünschten Informationen -ausgegeben werden und das Programm anschließend sofort wieder beendet -wird.</p> -<p> -Durch das Einbinden von <code>calcurse --todo --appointment</code> in eine init config -Datei ist es beispielsweise möglich, sich seine zu erledigenden Aufgaben -und alle Termine des heutigen Tages beim Logon anzeigen zu lassen.</p> - - -<h3>4.2.2 Interaktiver Modus<a name="basics_interface_interactive"></a></h3> -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to - the default ones, defined when <code>calcurse</code> is launched - for the first time. If those key bindings do not suit user's needs, - it is possible to change them within the keys configuration menu - (see <a href="#options_keys">key bindings</a>).</p> -</div> -<p> -Wird keine, oder nur Option -c angegeben, startet -<code>calcurse</code> im interaktiven Modus. In diesem Modus erhält -man ein Interface mit drei unterschiedlichen Panels, einer -Benachrichtigungszeile, sowie einer Status-Zeile (siehe unten). -Die einzelnen Panels lassen sich durch die 'TAB'-Taste ansteuern.</p> -<pre> - - Termin-Panel---. .---Kalender-Panel - | | - v v - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - | Termine || Kalender | - |------------------------------------||----------------------------| - | (|) 6. April 2006 || April 2006 | - | || Mo Di Mi Do Fr Sa So | - | || 1 2 | - | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | - | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | - | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - | || | - | |+----------------------------+ - | |+----------------------------+ - | || Aufgaben | todo- - | ||----------------------------| Panel - | || | | - | || | | - | || |<--. - | || | - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - |---[ So 2006-10-22 | 10:11:43 ]---(apts)----> 01:20 :: lunch <---|<--. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ Benachrichtigungszeile - | ? Hilfe S Speichern H/L -/+1 Tag Tab ändere Ansicht | - | Q Beenden G Gehe zu J/K -/+1 Woche C Einstellung |<-. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | - | - Statuszeile - -</pre> -<p> -Das Kalender-Panel hebt den gewünschten Tag farblich hervor, während -das Termin-Panel die Liste mit Terminen des angesteuerten Tags -anzeigt. Das todo-Panel dagegen zeigt eine Liste mit den zu -erledigenden Aufgaben, die keinem bestimmten Tage zugeordnet sind.</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display - a monthly (default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. - The weekly view would look like the following:</p> - <pre> - -+------------------------------------+ -| Calendar | -|----------------------------(# 13)--| -| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | -| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | -| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM -| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday -| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM -+------------------------------------+ - - </pre> -<p> - The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel - (<span class="emp"># 13</span> meaning it is the 13th week of the year - in the above example). The seven days of the current week are displayed - in column. Each day is divided into slices of 4 hours each (6 slices in - total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a different color if - an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. -</p> -</div> - -<p> - Im Termin-Panel kann man <span class="emp">'(|)'</span> Symbol vor das -Datum setzen. Dies zeigt die aktuelle Mondfase. Je nach Mondfase -können die folgenden Symbole erscheinen: - <dl class="compact"> - <dt>'<code> |) </code>':</dt> - <dd>Halbmond, erste Hälfte</dd> - <dt>'<code> (|) </code>':</dt> - <dd>Vollmond</dd> - <dt>'<code> (| </code>':</dt> - <dd>Halbmond, letzte Hälfte</dd> - <dt>'<code> | </code>':</dt> - <dd>Neumond</dd> - <dt>Kein Symbol:</dt> - <dd>die Mondfase ist keinem der oberen zuzuordnen</dd> - </dl> -</p> -<p> -Die letzten beiden Zeilen des Interfaces zeigen die Status-Zeile, die -über die möglichen Befehle und ihre entsprechenden Tasten -informiert.</p> -<p> -Direkt über der Statuszeile befindet sich die Benachrichtigungszeile, die -von links nach rechts gesehen die folgenden Elemente anzeigt: Das aktuelle Datum, -die aktuelle Uhrzeit, die momentan verwendete Kalenderdatei (im obigen Beispiel -die standardmäßig verwendete Kalenderdatei apts [Vergleiche hierzu -den folgenden Abschnitt]) und der nächste Termin, der in den kommenden 24 -Stunden ansteht. Im Beispiel ist dies der Termin lunch, der in 1 Stunde und -zwanzig Minuten beginnt.</p> -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beachte:</span> -Einige Handlungen, wie beispielsweise das Verändern oder -Hinzufügen eines Termins, benötigen Texteingaben, die -mithilfe des eingebauten Eingabeeditors eingegeben werden.</p> -<p> -Geht eine Zeile über die Bildschirmzeile hinaus, wird dies innerhalb -des Editors durch die Zeichen '>', '*', und '<' dargestellt. -Dadurch wird in der letzten Spalten darauf hingewiesen, dass sich -vor, vor und hinter, beziehungsweise nur hinter der momentanten -Position weiterer Text befindet. Gegebenenfalls wird Zeile -horizontal gescrollt.</p> -<p> -Darüberhinaus sind einigen Editierfunktionen spezielle Tastenkürzel -zugewiesen, die in der folgenden Übersicht zusammengefasst sind. -Hierbei steht '^' für die Taste 'Strg' beziehungsweise 'Ctrl': -<dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>^a</code>:</dt> - <dd>Positioniert den Cursor an den Anfang der Eingabezeile</dd> - <dt><code>^b</code>:</dt> - <dd>Bewegt den Cursor rückwärts</dd> - <dt><code>^d</code>:</dt> - <dd>Löscht das folgende Zeichen</dd> - <dt><code>^e</code>:</dt> - <dd>Positioniert den Cursor an das Ende der Eingabezeile</dd> - <dt><code>^h</code>:</dt> - <dd>Löscht das vorhergehende Zeichen</dd> - <dt><code>^k</code>:</dt> - <dd>Löscht die Eingabe von der aktuellen Cursorposition bis - an das Zeileende</dd> - <dt><code>ESCAPE</code>:</dt> - <dd>Bricht die Bearbeitung ab</dd> -</dl> -</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.3 Background mode<a name="basics_daemon"></a></h2> - -<p>When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu -(see <a href="#options_notify">Notify-bar settings</a>), <code>calcurse</code> will stay -in background when the user interface is not running. In background mode, -<code>calcurse</code> checks for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined -notification command when necessary. When the user interface is started again, -the daemon automatically stops.</p> - -<p><code>calcurse</code> background activity can be logged (set the -<code>notify-daemon_log</code> variable in the notification configuration -<a href="#options_notify">menu</a>), and in that case, information about the daemon -start and stop time, reminders' command launch time, signals received... will be written -in the <code>daemon.log</code> file (see section <a href="#basics_files">files</a>).</p> - -<p> -Using the <code>--status</code> command line option (see section -<a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">Command line arguments</a>), -one can know if <code>calcurse</code> is currently running in background or not. -If the daemon is running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of -the daemon process will be shown): -<pre>calcurse is running in background (pid 14536)</pre> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> -To stop the daemon, just send the <code>TERM</code> signal to it, using a command such as: -<code>'kill daemon_pid'</code>, where <span class="emp">daemon_pid</span> is the process id -of the daemon (14536 in the above example). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.4 <code>calcurse</code> Dateien<a name="basics_files"></a></h2> -<p> -Die folgende Verzeichnisstruktur wird im $HOME-Verzeichnis angelegt, -<div class="todo">(or in the directory you specified with the -D option)</div> -wenn <code>calcurse</code> das erste Mal gestartet wird:</p> -<pre> -$HOME/.calcurse/ - |___notes/ - |___conf - |___keys - |___apts - |___todo -</pre> -<dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>notes/</code>:</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">this subdirectory contains descriptions of the notes - which are attached to appointments, events or todos. One text file is - created per note, whose name is built using mkstemp(3) and should be - unique, but with no relation with the corresponding item's description.</span></dd> - <dt><code>conf</code>:</dt> - <dd>Datei enthält die Informationen zur Benutzerkonfiguration.</dd> - <dt><code>keys</code>:</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">this file contains the user-defined key bindings</span></dd> - <dt><code>apts</code>:</dt> - <dd>Datei enthält alle Termine.</dd> - <dt><code>todo</code>:</dt> - <dd>Datei enthält die todo-Liste.</dd> -</dl> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification - configuration menu, the extra file <code>daemon.log</code> will appear - in calcurse data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity - when running in background. - </p> -</div> - - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.5 Import/Export capabilities<a name="basics_import_export"></a></h2> -<p> - The import and export capabilities offered by <code>calcurse</code> - are described below. -</p> - -<h3>4.5.1 Import<a name="basics_import"></a></h3> -<p> - Data in icalendar format as described in the rfc2445 specification - (see <a href="#links_others">links</a> section below) can be imported - into calcurse. Calcurse ical parser is based on version 2.0 of this - specification, but for now on, only a subset of it is supported. -</p> -<p> - The following icalendar properties are handled by calcurse: - <ul> - <li><code>VTODO</code> items:<br> - "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION"</li> - <li><code>VEVENT</code> items:<br> - "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", - "DESCRIPTION"</li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - The icalendar "DESCRIPTION" property will be converted into calcurse format - by adding a note to the item. If a "VALARM" property is found, the item - will be flagged as important and the user will get a notification (this is - only applicable to appointments). -</p> -<p> - Here are the properties that are not implemented: - <ul> - <li>negative time durations are not taken into account (item is skipped)</li> - <li>some recurence frequences are not recognize:<br> - "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / "HOURLY"</li> - <li>some recurrence keywords are not recognized - (all those starting with 'BY'):<br> - "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY"<br> - "BYYEARDAY" / "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS"<br> - plus "WKST"</li> - <li>the recurrence exception keyword "EXRULE" is not recognized</li> - <li>timezones are not taken into account</li> - </ul> -</p> - -<h3>4.5.2 Export<a name="basics_export"></a></h3> -<p> - Two possible export formats are available: <code>ical</code> and - <code>pcal</code> (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below - to find out about those formats). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.6 Online Hilfe<a name="basics_help"></a></h2> -<p> -Das integrierte Hilfe-System kann jederzeit mit '?' aufgerufen -werden. Informationen über bestimmte Befehle können mit der -entsprechenden Taste des Befehls aufgerufen werden. -</p> - -<h1>5. Optionen<a name="options"></a></h1> -<p> -Sämtliche in <code>calcurse</code> veränderbaren Parameter lassen sich -Konfigurationsmenü einstellen. Drücken Sie hierzu die Taste 'C'. -Daraufhin erscheint ein Untermenü mit vier weiteren Wahlmöglichkeiten: -Das erneute Betätigen von 'C' führt Sie zu den Farbeinstellungen und -über 'L' gelangen Sie in ein Untermenü, in dem Sie die Anordnung der -drei Panel ändern können. Drücken Sie 'G' um ins Auswahlmenü -der allgemeinen Optionen zu gelangen. -<span class="todo">pressing 'K' opens the key bindings configuration -menu.</span> -Zu guter Letzt können Sie die -Einstellungen der Benachrichtigungszeile ändern, indem Sie die Taste 'N' -betätigen.</p> - -<h2>5.1 Allgemeine Optionen<a name="options_general"></a></h2> -<p> -Die im Folgenden beschriebenen Optionen steuern <code>calcurse</code>s -allgemeines Verhalten.</p> -<dl> - <dt><code>automatisches_Speichern</code> - (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Ist diese Option aktiviert, werden die Benutzerdaten automatisch beim - Verlassen gespeichert. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">warnung:</span> - Beim Verlassen werden keine Daten gespeichert, - wenn <code>automatisches_Speichern</code> auf <span class="emp">nein</span> gesetzt wurde. Um Ihre - Eingaben dennoch zu speichern, müssen Sie als Nutzer die Taste 'S' - betätigen.</p> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">periodic_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If different from '0', user's data will be automatically - saved every <span class="emp">periodic_save</span> minutes. - When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks - (i.e. '<code>**</code>') will appear on the top right-hand side - of the screen).</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>Beenden_bestätigen</code> - (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Wenn <span class="emp">ja</span> eingestellt worden ist, wird nachgefragt, ob das - Programm wirklich beenden werden soll. Wurde <span class="emp">nein</span> gewählt, - wird das Programm durch die Eingabe von 'Q' ohne Nachfrage sofort beendet.</dd> - <dt><code>Löschen_bestätigen</code> - (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Wurde <span class="emp">ja</span> eingestellt, fragt das Programm nach, ob ein - Eintrag wirklich gelöscht werden soll (entweder ein todo-Eintrag oder - ein Termin). Wurde <span class="emp">nein</span> gewählt, wird beim Drücken von 'D' - ohne Nachfrage gelöscht.</dd> - <dt><code>Systemdialoge_überspringen</code> - (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">nein</span>)</dt> - <dd>Durch Setzen auf <span class="emp">ja</span> werden die Dialoge beim Speichern und - Laden umgangen. Nützlich, wenn es mal schnell gehen muss.</dd> - <dt><code>Fortschrittsanzeige_überspringen</code> - (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">nein</span>)</dt> - <dd>Wird diese Option aktiviert, wird die beim Speichern von Daten normalerweise - erscheinende Fortschrittsanzeige nicht mehr angezeigt. - Ist diese Option auf <span class="emp">nein</span> gesetzt, werden ein - Zustandsbalken und der Name der zu speichernden Datei (siehe - Abschnitt <a href="#basics_files">Calcurse Dateien</a>) angezeigt.</dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">calendar_default_view</span></code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to <span class="emp">0</span>, the monthly calendar view will be - displayed by default otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed.</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>Wochenbeginn_am_Montag</code> - (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Es ist möglich zwischen Montag und Sonntag als ersten Tag der Woche - zu wählen. Wird die Option auf <span class="emp">ja</span> gesetzt, wird Montag - als erster Tag der Woche festgelegt. Ist <span class="emp">nein</span> gewählt, - beginnt die Woche sonntags.</dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">output_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%D</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">This option indicates the format to be used when displaying dates - in non-interactive mode. Using the default values, dates are displayed the - following way: <span class="emp">mm/dd/aa</span>. - You can see all of the possible formats by typing <code>man 3 strftime</code> - inside a terminal.</span></dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">input_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">1</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">This option indicates the format that will be used to enter dates in - <span class="emp">calcurse</span>. Four choices are available:</span> - <ol> - <li>mm/dd/yyyy</li> - <li>dd/mm/yyyy</li> - <li>yyyy/mm/dd</li> - <li>yyyy-mm-dd</li> - </ol> - </dd> -</dl> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.2 Key bindings<a name="options_keys"></a></h2> -<p> - One can define it's own keybindings within the 'Keys' configuration - menu. The default keys look like the one used by the <code>vim</code> - editor, especially the displacement keys. Anyway, within this - configuration menu, users can redefine all of the keys available from - within calcurse's user interface.</p> -<p> - To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will - apply. Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new - one. You will then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new - binding. It is possible to define more than one key binding for a single - action.</p> -<p> - An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding - is not already set for another action. In that case, you will be asked - to choose a different one. Another check is done when exiting from this - menu, to make sure all possible actions have a key associated with it.</p> -<p> - The following keys can be used to define bindings: - <ul> - <li>lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as 'a', 'Z', '0'</li> - <li>CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters</li> - <li>escape, horizontal tab, and space keys</li> - <li>arrow keys (up, down, left, and right)</li> - <li>'HOME' and 'END' keys</li> - </ul> </p> -<p> - While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for - each one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the - highlighted action is used for.</p> -</div> - -<h2>5.3 Textfarben einstellen<a name="options_colors"></a></h2> -<p> -<code>calcurse</code> Textfarben können nach eigenen -Vorlieben eingestellt werden. Um die Standartfarben zu wechseln, -zeigt die Konfigurationsseite mögliche Farbwerte für -Vordergrund und Hintergrund. Benutze die Pfeiltasten zum bewegen und -'X' bzw. die Leertaste um eine Farbe zu wählen. Benutzer können -das gewählte Farbschema vorher betrachten. Die Liste enthält -auch den Eintrag für die Standartfarben des Terminals.</p> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The chosen color theme will then be applied to the panel borders, - to the titles, to the keystrokes, and to general informations - displayed inside status bar. A black and white theme is also - available, in order to support non-color terminals.</p> -</div> -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beachte:</span> - Der Farbunterstützung ist vom verwendeten Terminal und des der - Umgebungsvariablen <code>$TERM</code> zugewiesenen Werts abhängig. - Es erscheint eine Fehlermeldung, wenn versucht wird die Farbeinstellung - zu ändern, obwohl das Terminal keine Farben unterstützt. - Wenn sie sicher sind, dass ihr Terminal Farben darstellen kann, - in <code>calcurse</code> aber keine Farben erscheinen, versuchen Sie - die <code>$TERM</code> Variable auf einen anderen Wert zu setzen - (etwa <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span>). -</p> - -<h2>5.4 Layout einstellen<a name="options_layout"></a></h2> -<p> -Das Layout bezieht sich auf die Positionen der einzelnen Panel. Das -Standard-Layout zeigt das Kalender-Panel in der oberen linken Ecke des -Terminals, das todo-Panel befindet sich in der unteren rechten Ecke -und das Termin-Panel auf der linken Seite des Terminals (vgl. die -im Abschnitt <a href="#basics_interface_interactive">Interaktiver Modus</a> -dargestellte Zeichnung des Standard-Layouts). -Durch Auswahl eines anderen Layouts kann der Benutzer das -Erscheinungsbild von <code>calcurse</code> seinen eigenen Wünschen -entsprechend anpassen.</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The following option is used to modify the layout configuration:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>layout</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout - configuration screen for the description of the available layouts).</dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.5 Sidebar configuration<a name="options_sidebar"></a></h2> -<p> - The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: - the calendar and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo - list or the appointment list.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>side-bar_width</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar.</dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<h2>5.6 Benachrichtigungszeile einstellen<a name="options_notify"></a></h2> -<p> - Folgende Optionen ändern das Verhalten der Benachrichtigungszeile:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>Benachrichtigungszeile_anzeigen</code> (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Mit dieser Option legen Sie fest, ob die Benachrichtigungszeile anzeigt werden soll. </dd> - <dt><code>Benachrichtigungszeile_Datum</code> (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">%a %F</span>)</dt> - <dd>Hiermit kann das Format festgelegt werden, wie das aktuelle Datum innerhalb - der Benachrichtigungszeile angezeigt werden soll. - Die möglichen Formatdefinitionen können Sie sich durch die Eingabe - von <code>man 3 strftime</code> auf der Kommandozeile anzeigen lassen.</dd> - <dt><code>Benachrichtigungszeile_Uhrzeit</code> (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">%T</span>)</dt> - <dd>Hiermit kann das Format festgelegt werden, wie die aktuelle Uhrzeit - innerhalb der Benachrichtigungszeile angezeigt werden soll. - Die möglichen Formatdefinitionen können Sie sich durch die - Eingabe von <code>man 3 strftime</code> auf der Kommandozeile anzeigen - lassen.</dd> - <dt><code>Benachrichtigungszeile_Alarm</code> (Voreinstellung: <span class="emp">300</span>)</dt> - <dd>Beginnt ein Termin innerhalb der nächsten, in 'Benachrichtigungszeile_Alarm' - festgelegten Sekunden, wird der Termin innerhalb der Benachrichtigungszeile - blinkend dargestellt. Auf diese Weise wird der Nutzer auf einen baldigen Termin - hingewiesen. - Außerdem wird der Befehl, der durch - <code>Benachrichtigungszeile_Befehl</code> definiert ist, ausgeführt.</dd> - <dt><code>Benachrichtigungszeile_Befehl</code> (Voreinstellungt: <span class="emp">printf '\a'</span>)</dt> - <dd>Diese Option zeigt an, welcher Befehl ausgeführt wird, - wenn ein bevorstehender Termin durch 'wichtig' gekennzeichnet ist. - Dieser Befehl wird auf dem Terminal des Benutzers ausgeführt. - Die <code>$SHELL</code> Umgebungsvariable wird bei der Wahl des - richtigen Terminals berücksichtigt. Ist diese Variable nicht - gesetzt, wird stattdessen <code>/bin/sh</code> zur Ausführung - gewählt. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beispiel:</span> - Der <code>mail</code> Befehl ist auf dem System - des Benutzer verfügbar. Man kann den folgenden Befehl benutzen, - um an bevorstehende Termine erinnert zu werden (die Beschreibung - des Termins wird ebenso berücksichtigt im Mailkopf):</p> - <code> -calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] upcoming appointment!" user@host.com - </code> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_enable</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning <code>calcurse</code> - will run into background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the - notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More details - can be found in section <a href="#basics_daemon">'Background mode'</a>.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_log</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, <code>calcurse</code> daemon activity will be logged (see section - <a href="#basics_files">files</a></span>). - </dd> -</dl> - -<h1>6. Bekannte Fehler<a name="known_bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Es kommt vor, dass Wörter bei Verwendung der schwarz/weißen - Farbkombination falsch hervorgehoben werden, wenn die - <code>$TERM</code> Variable auf <span class="emp">xterm-color</span> gesetzt ist. - Um diesen Fehler zu vermeiden, sollte nach Aussage von - Thomas E. Dickey (zuständig für <code>xterm</code>), - <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> an Stelle für <span class="emp">xterm-color</span> als - <code>$TERM</code> Variable gesetzt werden:</p> - <blockquote class="rq"> - "The xterm-color value for $TERM is a bad choice for XFree86 xterm - because it is commonly used for a terminfo entry which happens to - not support bce. Use the xterm-xfree86 entry which is distributed - with XFree86 xterm (or the similar one distributed with ncurses)." - </blockquote> - -<h1>7. Mitteilung von Fehlern und Anregungen<a name="bugs"></a></h1> -<p> -Bitte mailen Sie Fehler oder auch Anregungen an:</p> -<pre>calcurse @ culot . org</pre> -<p> -Oder an den Autor:</p> -<pre>frederic @ culot . org</pre> - -<h1>8. Wie kann ich einen Beitrag leisten?<a name="contribute"></a></h1> -<p> -Wenn Sie gerne dieses Projekt unterstützen möchten, können Sie mir -zuerst eine kurze Rückmeldung geben. Was finden Sie an diesem Programm gut -oder was könnte besser sein? Gibt es vielleicht Programmeigenschaften, die -Sie vermissen? Teilen Sie sie mir mit!</p> -<p> -Von nun an ist es auch möglich, sich an der Übersetzung der Programmmitteilungen -und der Dokumentation von <code>calcurse</code> zu beteiligen. </p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Beachte:</span> - Jegliche Unterstützung <code>calcurse</code> - in andere Sprachen zu übersetzen ist sehr willkommen. Bevor Sie beginnen, sollten - Sie jedoch eine E-Mail an <code>calcurse-i18n @ culot . org</code> senden: So erfahren Sie, - ob jemand die Übersetzung in Ihrer Sprache schon begonnen hat.</p> - -<h2>8.1 Übersetzung der Dokumentation<a name="contribute_documentation"></a></h2> -<p> - Das <span class="emp">doc/</span> Verzeichnis des Quellcodearchivs enthält bereits - übersetzte Versionen des <code>calcurse</code> Handbuchs. - Ist eine Übersetzung in Ihrer Sprache noch nicht vorhanden, - wäre es großartig, wenn Sie eine solche erstellen könnten.</p> -<p> - Kopieren Sie dazu eine der vorhandenen Version mit dem Dateinamen - <code>manual_XX.html</code>, wobei <span class="emp">XX</span> - das entsprechende Kürzel Ihrer Sprache ist. Übersetzen Sie diese - Datei anschließend und senden Sie sie dann an den Autor - (siehe <a href="#bugs">Mitteilung von Fehlern und Anregungen</a>), damit Ihre - Übersetzung der nächsten <code>calcurse</code> Version - hinzugefügt werden kann.</p> - -<h2>8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n<a name="contribute_i18n"></a></h2> -<p> - Wie bereits erwähnt, verwendet <code>calcurse</code> die <code>gettext</code> - Utilities um mehrsprachige Programmmitteilungen zu erzeugen. - Dieser Abschnitt informiert Sie darüber, wie Programmmitteilungen in Ihre - Muttersprache übersetzt werden. Dieses Howto zur Übersetzung von - <code>calcurse</code> mittels <code>gettext</code> ist natürlich nur als Einstieg - gedacht und mit Absicht recht knapp gehalten. Um umfassendere Informationen - zu erhalten und sich die große weite Welt der Internationalisierung von Software zu - erschließen, sollten Sie die Seite der <code>GNU - gettext</code>-Anleitung besuchen:</p> - <pre>http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/</pre> -<p> - An der Übersetzung sind im Grunde drei verschiedene Entwickler beteiligt: - Programmierer, Sprachkoordinator und Übersetzer. - Nach einem kurzen Überblick, wie so etwas funktioniert, werden anschließend die - Aufgaben des Übersetzers beschrieben.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.1 Überblick<a name="contribute_i18n_overview"></a></h3> -<p> -Um Text in der Muttersprache des Benutzers erscheinen zu lassen, sind zwei Schritte nötig: -<span class="emp">Internationalisierung</span> -(i18n) und <span class="emp">Lokalisierung</span> (l10n).</p> -<p> - Bei der i18n geht es darum, <code>calcurse</code> auf die Unterstützung mehrerer - Sprachen vorzubereiten. Dies ist die Aufgabe des Programmierers, der die zu - übersetzenden Texte markiert und andererseits sicherstellen muss, dass zur Laufzeit - des Programms der übersetzt Text erscheint.</p> -<p> - Bei der l10n geht es darum, dem bereits internationalisierten - also i18n markierten - - <code>calcurse</code> die entsprechende Übersetzung des Benutzers zur Verfügung - zu stellen. - Gemäß den Umgebungsvariablen ersetzt <code>calcurse</code> die zuvor vom - Programmierer markierten Texte durch die entsprechenden Übersetzungen.</p> -<p> - Die zu übersetzenden Texte werden also zunächst vom Programmierer im - <code>C</code>-Quellcode markiert und in einem Template (<span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> - - die Dateierweiterung <span class="emp">pot</span> steht für <span class="emp">portable object template</span>) - gesammelt. Anschließend wird der Inhalt dieses Templates mit den Dateien, die - die Übersetzungen enthalten zusammengeführt (<span class="emp">fr.po</span> enthält - beispielsweise die Französische Übersetzung (<span class="emp">po</span> steht hierbei - für <span class="emp">portable object</span>, also ein von Menschen les- und veränderbares - Dateiformat), - Der Übersetzer kann diese Datei öffnen, die enthaltenen Texte übersetzen - und sie dann an den Programmierer zurück senden. - Wird das Programm compiliert, erzeugt der Compiler (aus Gründen der Effizienz) - eine binäre Version dieser Datei, die später installiert wird (<span class="emp">fr.mo</span> - - <span class="emp">mo</span> steht für <span class="emp">machine object</span>; dieses Format kann nur von - Programmen gelesen werden). <code>calcurse</code> nutzt diese Datei zur Laufzeit, - um die Texte in Abhängigkeit der lokalen Einstellungen des Benutzers zu - übersetzen.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.2 Aufgaben des Übersetzers<a name="contribute_i18n_translator"></a></h3> -<p> - Wenn Sie mit der Übersetzung in eine neue Sprache beginnen möchten, - finden Sie hierzu die nötigen Schritte:</p> - <ul> - <li>Finden Sie zunächst das Kürzel Ihrer Sprache heraus. - Beispielsweise ist das Kürzel für Französisch 'fr_FR', oder - einfach nur 'fr'. Diesen Wert muss der Benutzer der Umgebungsvariablen - <code>LC_ALL</code> zuweisen, um die Software übersetzt starten zu können - (siehe <a href="#basics_invocation_variable">Umgebungsvariable für i18n</a>).</li> - <li>Wechseln Sie dann ins <span class="emp">po/</span> Verzeichnis und erzeugen Sie aus dem Template - mit dem folgendem Aufruf eine neue po-Datei: - <code>'msginit -i calcurse.pot -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator'</code> - Sollte <code>msginit</code> nicht auf Ihrem System installiert sein, kopieren Sie einfach - die Datei <span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> nach <span class="emp">fr.po</span> und änderen Sie den Inhalt am - Anfang der Datei von Hand.</li> - </ul> -<p> - Wurde die Datei <span class="emp">fr.po</span> erstellt, kann mit der eigentlichen Übersetzung - begonnen werden.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.3 po-Dateien<a name="contribute_i18n_po-files"></a></h3> -<p> - Das Format der po-Dateien ist relativ einfach. po-Dateien gliedern sich in lediglich - vier Bestandteile:</p> - <ol> - <li><span class="emp">location Zeilen:</span> geben an, wo sich der Text befindet (Name der Datei und Zeilennummer).</li> - <li><span class="emp">msgid Zeilen:</span> der ursprüngliche, also zu übersetzende Text.</li> - <li><span class="emp">msgstr Zeilen:</span> der übersetzte Text.</li> - <li><span class="emp">Zeilen, die mit '#' beginnen:</span> Kommentare (einige mit spezieller Bedeutung, - wie wir weiter unten noch sehen werden).</li> - </ol> -<p> - Übersetzen Sie die <span class="emp">msgid</span> Zeilen und tragen Sie den übersetzten Text in die - sich direkt darunterbefindlichen, mit <span class="emp">msgstr</span> gekennzeichneten Zeilen ein.</p> -<p> - <span class="valorise">Einige Anmerkungen:</span> - <dl> - <dt><span class="emp">Fuzzy Texte</span></dt> - <dd>Einige Texte sind mit <code>"#, fuzzy"</code> kommentiert. <code>calcurse</code> nutzt - derart markierte Texte nicht. Ein als fuzzy markierter Text deutet entweder darauf hin, dass - der Text schon übersetzt wurde, aber die Stelle im Programmcode verändert wurde, oder - aber es handelt sich um einen neuen Text, für welchen <code>gettext</code> eine sog. 'wild - guess' vornimmt, also selbst eine Übersetzung versucht. - Das bedeutet, die Übersetzung sollte noch einmal überarbeitet werden. - Manchmal wurde der Originaltext verändert, weil ein Rechtschreibfehler korrigiert wurde. - In einem solchen Fall muss nichts geändert werden. - Mitunter ist die Übersetzung aber nicht mehr passend oder schlichtweg falsch und muss - abgeändert werden. - Entfernen Sie die <code>"#, fuzzy"</code>-Zeilen, wenn Sie mit Ihrer Übersetzung fertig - sind, damit <code>calcurse</code> die übersetzten Zeilen wieder verwendet und anzeigt.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">c-Format Texte und besondere Sequenzen</span></dt> - <dd>Einige Texte haben folgende Kommentare: <code>"#, c-format"</code>. - Dieser Kommentar weist darauf hin, dass Teile dieses Textes eine besondere Bedeutung - haben und dieser Text nicht verändert werden sollte. - Beispielsweise bedeuten die %-Sequenzen, wie <code>"%s"</code>, dass <code>calcurse</code> - dort Text einfügen wird. Es ist also wichtig, diese nicht zu verändern. - Ebenso kommen \-Sequenzen , wie etwa <code>\n</code> oder <code>\t</code> vor. Bitte - nehmen Sie auch hier keine Veränderungen vor. Erstere stellt das Zeilenende dar, - letztere einen Tabulator.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Übersetzungen können in Blöcke geschrieben werden</span></dt> - <dd>Sollten Zeilen zu lang werden, können sie auf mehrere verteilt werden: - <pre> -msgid "" -"some very long line" -"another line" - </pre> - <dt><span class="emp">po-Header</span></dt> - <dd>Ganz zu Anfang einer po-Datei befindet sich der Header, der einige Informationen enthält. - Die wichtigste Information ist der Zeichensatz. Er sollte diesem ähnlich sein - <pre> -"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" - </pre> - Auch das Übersetzer-Feld sollte ausgefüllt sein, damit potentielle Mitstreiter, - die sich an der Übersetzung beteiligen wollen, mit Ihnen Kontakt aufnehmen können. - Ebenso können von anderen entdeckte Fehler an den Übersetzer gemeldet werden. Geben - Sie Ihren Namen an, oder tragen Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse ein. Zum Beispiel folgendermaßen: - <pre> -"Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Kommentare</span></dt> - <dd>Das Hinzufügen von Kommentaren (Zeilen beginnen mit dem '#' Zeichen) ist eine gute - Möglichkeit, um Probleme und Übersetzungsschwierigkeiten anderen besser - mitteilen zu können.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Längen der Texte</span></dt> - <dd><code>calcurse</code> ist ein curses/Konsolen Programm und ist somit stark von der - Größe des Terminals (Anzahl der Spalten) abhängig. Dies sollte bei - der Übersetzung berücksichtigt werden. Häufig müssen Texte in - eine einzige Zeile passen (Standardlänge ist 80 Zeichen). - Übersetzen Sie nicht blindlings darauf los! Versuchen Sie herauszufinden, wo der - Text angezeigt wird, um die Übersetzung entsprechend anzupassen.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Ein paar nützliche Programme</span></dt> - <dd>Das po-Dateiformat ist sehr einfach und kann mit jedem Standard-Editor bearbeitet werden. - Es gibt aber auch einige spezielle Tools die das Erstellen und Änder der po-Dateien - vereinfachen: - <ul> - <li><code>poEdit</code> (<a - href="http://www.poedit.org/" target="_blank"> - http://www.poedit.org/</a>)</li> - <li><code>KBabel</code> (<a - href="http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/" target="_blank"> - http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/</a>)</li> - <li><code>GTranslator</code> (<a - href="http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/" target="_blank"> - http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/</a>)</li> - <li><code>Emacs</code> po mode</li> - <li><code>Vim</code> po mode</li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Zu Schluss noch</span></dt> - <dd>Ich hoffe es wird Ihnen Freude bereiten, wenn Sie sich an diesem Projekt und - seiner Internationalisierung beteiligen :). Bitte scheuen Sie sich nicht, mir - eine E-Mail, <span class="emp">frederic @ culot . org</span>, zu schreiben, sollten noch Fragen offen sein.</dd> - </dl> - - -<h1>9. Links<a name="links"></a></h1> -<p> -Dieser Abschnitt enthält Links und Angaben, die Sie interessieren -könnten.</p> - -<h2>9.1 <code>calcurse</code> Internetseite<a name="links_homepage"></a></h2> -<p> -Die Internetseite des Projekts <code>calcurse</code> lautet:</p> -<pre>http://culot.org/calcurse</pre> - -<h2>9.2 <code>calcurse</code> Ankündigungsliste<a name="links_list"></a></h2> -<p> -Wenn Sie an <code>calcurse</code> Interesse gefunden haben und Sie gerne -über Neuerscheinungen informiert werden möchten, können Sie sich -gerne in <code>calcurse</code>s Ankündigungsliste eintragen.</p> -<p> -Sobald eine neue Version veröffentlicht wird, werden Sie per E-Mail über -die neusten Eigenschaften von <code>calcurse</code> informiert<br> -Um sich in die Liste einzutragen, schicken Sie einfach eine E-Mail mit dem Betreff -"subscribe" an <span class="emp">calcurse-announce @ culot . org</span>.</p> - -<h2>9.3 <code>calcurse</code> RSS feed<a name="links_rss"></a></h2> -<p> - Um über neue Programmversionen informiert zu werden, können Sie - auch einfach den folgenden RSS-Feed aufrufen:</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml</pre> -<p> - Sobald eine neue <code>calcurse</code>-Version verfügbar ist wird - der RSS-Feed aktualisiert und enthält eine Beschreibung der neu - hinzugekommenen Programmfunktionen.</p> - -<h2><div class="todo">9.4 Other links</div><a name="links_others"></a></h2> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - You may want to look at the ical format specification (rfc2445) at: - <pre>http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445</pre> -<p> - The pcal project page can be found at: - <pre>http://pcal.sourceforge.net/</pre> -</div> - -<h1>10. Danksagungen<a name="thanks"></a></h1> -<p> -Folgenden Leuten möchte ich gerne für Ihre Unterstützung danken, ohne -die dieses Projekt nicht möglich gewesen wäre. Hier ist die Liste -derjenigen, denen ich Danke sagen möchte: -<ul> -<li>Alex für die Patches, Hilfen und Erläuterungen zur <code>C</code> Programmierung.</li> -<li>Gwen fürs Testen und die Anregungen, wie <code>calcurse</code> verbessert werden kann.</li> -<li>Herbert für das Binary-Packet auf FreeBSD</li> -<li>Zul für das Binary-Packet auf NetBSD</li> -<li>Wain, Steffen und Ronald für das Binary-Packet auf Archlinux</li> -<li>Kevin, Ryan, und fEnIo für das Binary-Packet auf Debian und Ubuntu.</li> -<li>Pascal für das Binary-Packet auf Slackware</li> -<li>Alexandre für das Binary-Packet auf Mac OsX und Darwin.</li> -<li>Igor für das Binary-Packet auf ALT Linux</li> -<li>Joel für sein Kalender-Skript, das mich zum Calcurse-Layout inspiriert hat.</li> -<li>Michael Schulz und Chris M. für die Übersetzung der Dokumentation ins Deutsche.</li> -<li>Jose Lopez für die Übersetzung der Dokumentation ins Spanische.</li> -<li>Neil Williams für die Übersetzung ins Englische.</li> -<li>Leandro Noferini für die Übersetzung ins Italienisches.</li> -<li>Tony für seine Patches, welche die Funktion -recur_item_inday() verbessern half -<span class="todo">, and for implementing the date format configuration options</span></li> -<li>Jeremy Roon für die Übersetzung ins Dutch.</li> -<li><div class="todo">Erik Saule for its patch implementing the '-N', '-s', '-S', '-r' and '-D' flags</div></li> -<li>Leute die Programme geschrieben haben, die ich mag und mich inspiriert haben, insbesondere: - <ul> - <li><code>vim</code> für die Befehlssteuerung</li> - <li><code>orpheus</code> und <code>abook</code> für die Dokumentation</li> - <li><code>pine</code> und <code>aptitude</code> für das Text-Benutzer-Interface</li> - <li><span class="todo"><code>tmux</code> for coding style</span></li> - </ul></li> -</ul> -</p> -<p> -Und zuletzt, vielen vielen Dank an alle <code>calcurse</code> -Benutzer, die mir Ihr Feedback mitgeteilt haben.</p> - -<div class="footer"> - Copyright © 2004-2010 Frédéric Culot<br> - German translation by Michael Schulz - <code><bloodshower .at. web .dot. de></code>, and Chris.<br> - Calcurse version 2.8 - Last change: March 29, 2010<br> -</div> -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/doc/manual_en.html b/doc/manual_en.html deleted file mode 100644 index 89ba526..0000000 --- a/doc/manual_en.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1331 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<!-- -/* - * $calcurse: manual_en.html,v 1.29 2010/03/29 18:18:02 culot Exp $ - * - * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - */ ---> - -<html> -<head> -<title>CALCURSE documentation</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> -<style type="text/css" media="all"> - @import url(manual.css); -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div id="mainContent"> - -<h1 id="title"> -<span class="main">CALCURSE - text-based organizer</span></h1> - -<div class="warn"> -<h1>Abstract</h1> This manual describes <code>calcurse</code> functionnalities, -and how to use them. The installation from source is first described, together -with the available command line arguments. The user interface -is then presented, with all of the customizable options that change -<code>calcurse</code> behavior. Last, bug reporting procedure is explained, as -well as the way one can contribute to <code>calcurse</code> development. -</div> - -<div id="toc"> -<h1>Table of Contents</h1> -<ul> - <li><a href="#intro">1. Introduction</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview">2. Overview</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#overview_history">2.1 Creation history</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview_features">2.2 Important features</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install">3. Installation</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements">3.1 Requirements</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_ncurses">3.1.1 <code>ncurses</code> library</a></li> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_gettext">3.1.2 <code>gettext</code> library</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install_process">3.2 Install process</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics">4. <code>calcurse</code> basics</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation">4.1 Invocation</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">4.1.1 Command line arguments</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_variable">4.1.2 Environment variable for i18n</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_environment">4.1.3 Other environment variables</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface">4.2 User interface</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_noninteractive">4.2.1 Non-interactive mode</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_interactive">4.2.2 Interactive mode</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_daemon">4.3 Background mode</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_files">4.4 <code>calcurse</code> files</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_import_export">4.5 Import/Export capabilities</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_import">4.5.1 Import</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_export">4.5.2 Export</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_help">4.6 Online help</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#options">5. Options</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#options_general">5.1 General options</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_keys">5.2 Key bindings</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_colors">5.3 Color themes</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_layout">5.4 Layout configuration</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_sidebar">5.5 Sidebar configuration</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_notify">5.6 Notify-bar settings</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#known_bugs">6. Known bugs</a></li> - <li><a href="#bugs">7. Reporting bugs and feedback</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute">8. How to contribute?</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_documentation">8.1 Translating documentation</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n">8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_overview">8.2.1 Overview</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_translator">8.2.2 Translator tasks</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_po-files">8.2.3 po-files</a></li> - </ul></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#links">9. Links</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#links_homepage">9.1 <code>calcurse</code> homepage</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_list">9.2 <code>calcurse</code> announce list</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_rss">9.3 <code>calcurse</code> RSS feed</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_others">9.4 Other links</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#thanks">10. Thanks</a></li> -</ul> -</div> - -<h1>1. Introduction<a name="intro"></a></h1> -<p> -<code>calcurse</code> is a text-based calendar and scheduling application. It helps -keeping track of events, appointments and everyday tasks. -A configurable notification system reminds user of upcoming deadlines, -and the curses based interface can be customized to suit user needs. -All of the commands are documented within an online help system. -</p> - -<h1>2. Overview<a name="overview"></a></h1> -<h2>2.1 Creation history<a name="overview_history"></a></h2> -<p> - I started thinking about this project when I was finishing - my Ph.D. in Astrophysics... It started to be a little hard - to organize myself, and I really needed a good tool to help - me in that difficult task ;) -</p> -<p> - I like programs which use Text User Interfaces, because they - are simple, fast, portable and efficient, so I thought about - working on coding a simple calendar using such an interface. - Moreover, I wanted to go on learning the <code>C</code> - language, which I only used for a while during my undergraduate - studies. So I thought that would be the good project to start - in order to get organized and to learn about a few - <code>C</code> things ! -</p> -<p> - Unfortunately, I finished my Ph.D. before finishing - <code>calcurse</code>, - but anyway, I still wanted to work on it, hoping it would - be helpful to other people. So here it is... -</p> -<p> - But why 'calcurse' anyway ? Well, it is simply the - concatenation of 'CALendar' and 'nCURSEs', the name of the - library used to build the user interface. -</p> - -<h2>2.2 Important features<a name="overview_features"></a></h2> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> is multi-platform and intended to be - lightweight, fast and reliable. It is to be used inside a - console or terminal, locally or on a distant machine within - an ssh (or similar) connection. -</p> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> can be run in two different modes : - interactive or non-interactive mode. The first mode allows - oneself to view its own personal organizer almost everywhere, - thanks to the text-based interface. - The second mode permits to easily build reminders just by adding - <code>calcurse</code> with appropriate command line arguments - inside a cron tab or within a shell init script. -</p> -<p> - Moreover, <code>calcurse</code> was created with the end-user - in mind, and tends to be as friendly as possible. This means - a complete on-line help system, together with having all of - the possible actions displayed at any time inside a status bar. - The user interface is configurable, and one can choose - between several color and layout combinations. - Key bindings are also configurable, to fit everyone's needs. - Last, a configurable notification system reminds user of upcoming - appointments. The reminders are sent even if the user's interface - is not running, as calcurse is able to run in background. -</p> - -<h1>3. Installation<a name="install"></a></h1> -<h2>3.1 Requirements<a name="install_requirements"></a></h2> -<h3>3.1.1 <code>ncurses</code> library<a name="install_requirements_ncurses"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> requires only a <code>C</code> compiler, such as - <code>cc</code> or <code>gcc</code>, and the <code>ncurses</code> - library. - It would be very surprising not to have a valid <code>ncurses</code> - library already installed on your computer, but if not, you can - find it at the following url :</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - It is also possible to link <code>calcurse</code> against the - <code>ncursesw</code> library (ncurses with support for unicode). - However, UTF-8 is not yet supported by <code>calcurse</code>.</p> - -<h3>3.1.2 <code>gettext</code> library<a name="install_requirements_gettext"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> supports internationalization - (<span class="emp">i18n</span> hereafter) through the <code>gettext</code> - utilities. This means <code>calcurse</code> can produce - multi-lingual messages if compiled with native language - support (i.e. <span class="emp">NLS</span>). -</p> -<p> - However, - <span class="emp">NLS</span> is - optionnal and if you do not want to have support for - multi-lingual messages, you can disable this feature. This is - done by giving the <code>--disable-nls</code> option to - <code>configure</code> (see section <a - href="#install_process">Install process</a>). - To check if the <code>gettext</code> utilities are - installed on your system, you can search for the - <code>libintl.h</code> header file for instance:</p> - <pre>locate libintl.h</pre> -<p> - If this header file is not found, then you can obtain the - <code>gettext</code> sources at the following url :</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - Even if <code>libintl.h</code> is found on your - system, it can be wise to specify its location during the <a - href="#install_process">install process</a>, by using the - <code>--with-libintl-prefix</code> option with - <code>configure</code>. Indeed, the <code>configure</code> - could fail to locate this library if installed in an uncommon - place.</p> - - -<h2>3.2 Install process<a name="install_process"></a></h2> -<p> - First you need to gunzip and untar the source archive:</p> - <pre>tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz</pre> -<p> - Once you meet the requirements and have extracted the archive, - the install process is quite simple, and follows the standard - three steps process: - <ol> - <li><code>./configure</code></li> - <li><code>make</code></li> - <li><code>make install</code> (may require root privilege)</li> - </ol> -</p> -<p> - Use <code>./configure --help</code> to obtain a list of - possible options. -</p> - -<h1>4. <code>calcurse</code> basics<a name="basics"></a></h1> -<h2>4.1 Invocation<a name="basics_invocation"></a></h2> -<h3>4.1.1 Command line arguments<a name="basics_invocation_commandline"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> takes the following options from the - command line (both short and long options are supported):</p> - <p> - - <dl> - <dt><code>-a, --appointment</code></dt> - <dd> - Print the appointments and events for the current day and exit. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> the calendar from - which to read the appointments can be specified using the '-c' - flag.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-c <file>, --calendar <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Specify the calendar file to use. - The default calendar is <code>~/.calcurse/apts</code> - (see section <a href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> - files</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>-d <date|num>, --day <date|num></code></dt> - <dd> - Print the appointments for the given date or for the - given number of upcoming days, depending on the argument - format. Two possible formats are supported: - <ul> - <li>a date (possible formats described below).</li> - <li>a number 'n'.</li> - </ul> - In the first case, the appointment list for the - specified date will be returned, while in the second - case the appointment list for the 'n' upcoming days - will be returned. - As an example, typing <code>calcurse -d 3</code> - will display your appointments for today, tomorrow, - and the day after tomorrow. - Possible formats for specifying the date are defined inside the - general configuration menu (see - <a href="#options_general">General options</a>), using the - <code>input_datefmt</code> variable. - - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> as for the '-a' - flag, the calendar from which to read the appointments - can be specified using the '-c' flag.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-D <dir>, --directory <dir></code></dt> - <dd> - Specify the data directory to use. This option is - incompatible with -c. If not specified, the - default directory is <code>'~/.calcurse/'</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>-h, --help</code></dt> - <dd> - Print a short help text describing the supported - command-line options, and exit.</dd> - <dt><code>-i <file>, --import <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Import the icalendar data contained in <code>file</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>-n, --next</code></dt> - <dd> - Print the next appointment within upcoming 24 hours and exit. - The indicated time is the number of hours and minutes left - before this appointment. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> the calendar - from which to read the appointments can be specified using the - '-c' flag.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-N, --note</code></dt> - <dd> - When used with the '-a' or '-t' flag, also print note content - if one is associated with the displayed item. - </dd> - <dt><code>-r[num], --range[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Print events and appointments for the num number of - days and exit. If no num is given, a range of 1 day - is considered. - </dd> - <dt><code>-s[date], --startday[=date]</code></dt> - <dd> - Print events and appointments from date and exit. - If no date is given, the current day is considered. - </dd> - <dt><code>-S<regex>, --search=<regex></code></dt> - <dd> - When used with the '-a', '-d', '-r', '-s', or '-t' flag, - print only the items having a description that matches the given - regular expression. - </dd> - <dt><code>--status</code></dt> - <dd> - Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If - calcurse is running, this will tell if the interactive - mode was launched or if calcurse is running in background. - The process pid will also be indicated. - </dd> - <dt><code>-t[num], --todo[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Print the 'todo' list and exit. If the optional number - <code>num</code> is given, then only todos having a priority - equal to <code>num</code> will be returned. The priority number - must be between 1 (highest) and 9 (lowest). It is also possible - to specify '0' for the priority, in which case only completed - tasks will be shown.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-v, --version</code></dt> - <dd> - Display <code>calcurse</code> version and exit. - </dd> - <dt><code>-x[format], --export[=format]</code></dt> - <dd> - Export user data to specified format. Events, appointments and - todos are converted and echoed to stdout. - Two possible formats are available: ical and pcal - (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below). - If the optional argument <code>format</code> is not given, - ical format is selected by default. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - redirect standard output to export data to a file, - by issuing a command such as: - <code>$ calcurse --export > my_data.dat</code></p> - </dd> - </dl> - -<h3>4.1.2 Environment variable for i18n<a name="basics_invocation_variable"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> can be compiled with native language - support (see <a - href="#install_requirements_gettext"><code>gettext</code> - library</a>). Thus, if you wish to have messages displayed - into your native language, first make sure it is available by - looking at the <code>po/LINGUAS</code> file. - This file indicates the set of available languages by showing - the two-letters corresponding code (for exemple, - <span class="emp">fr</span> - stands for french). If you do not find your language, it - would be greatly appreciated if you could help translating - <code>calcurse</code> (see the <a href="#contribute">How to - contribute?</a> section).</p> -<p> - If your language is available, run - <code>calcurse</code> with the following command:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR calcurse</pre> -<p> - where <span class="emp">fr_FR</span> is the locale name in this exemple, but - should be replaced by the locale corresponding to the desired - language.</p> -<p> - You should also specify the charset to be used, because in some - cases the accents and such are not displayed correctly. - This charset is indicated at the beginning of the po file - corresponding to the desired language. For instance, you can see - in the fr.po file that it uses the iso-8859-1 charset, so you - could run <code>calcurse</code> using the following command:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR.ISO8859-1 calcurse</pre> - -<h3>4.1.3 Other environment variables<a name="basics_invocation_environment"></a></h3> -<p> - The following environment variables affect the way <code>calcurse</code> - operates:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>VISUAL</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies the external editor to use for writing notes. - </dd> - <dt><code>EDITOR</code></dt> - <dd>If the <code>VISUAL</code> environment variable - is not set, then <code>EDITOR</code> will be used as - the default external editor. If none of those variables are set, - then <code>/usr/bin/vi</code> is used instead. - </dd> - <dt><code>PAGER</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies the default viewer to be used for reading notes. - If this variable is not set, then <code>/usr/bin/less</code> is used. - </dd> - </dl> - -<h2>4.2 User interface<a name="basics_interface"></a></h2> -<h3>4.2.1 Non-interactive mode<a name="basics_interface_noninteractive"></a></h3> -<p> - When called with at least one of the following arguments: - <code>-a</code>, <code>-d</code>, <code>-h</code>, - <code>-n</code>, <code>-t</code>, <code>-v</code>, - <code>-x</code>, - <code>calcurse</code> is started in non-interactive mode. - This means the desired information will be displayed, and - after that, <code>calcurse</code> simply quits and you are - driven back to the shell prompt.</p> -<p> - That way, one can add a line such as - <code>'calcurse --todo --appointment'</code> - in its init config file to display at logon the list of tasks - and appointments scheduled for the current day. </p> - - -<h3>4.2.2 Interactive mode<a name="basics_interface_interactive"></a></h3> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to - the default ones, defined when <code>calcurse</code> is launched - for the first time. If those key bindings do not suit user's needs, - it is possible to change them within the keys configuration menu - (see <a href="#options_keys">key bindings</a>).</p> - - <p>When called without any argument or only with the - <code>-c</code> option, <code>calcurse</code> is started in - interactive mode. In this mode, you are shown an interface - containing three different panels which you can browse using - the 'TAB' key, plus a notification bar and a status bar - (see figure below).</p> - <pre> - - appointment panel---. .---calendar panel - | | - v v - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - | Appointments || Calendar | - |------------------------------------||----------------------------| - | (|) April 6, 2006 || April 2006 | - | ||Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | - | || 1 2 | - | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | - | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | - | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - | || | - | |+----------------------------+ - | |+----------------------------+ - | || ToDo | todo - | ||----------------------------| panel - | || | | - | || | | - | || |<--. - | || | - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - |---[ Mon 2006-11-22 | 10:11:43 ]---(apts)----> 01:20 :: lunch <---|<--. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ notify-bar - | ? Help R Redraw H/L -/+1 Day G GoTo C Config | - | Q Quit S Save J/K -/+1 Week Tab Chg View |<-. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | - | - status bar - - </pre> -<p> - The first panel represents a calendar which allows to highlight - a particular day, the second one contains the list of the events - and appointments on that day, and the last one contains a list - of tasks to do but which are not assigned to any specific day.</p> -<p> - Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display - a monthly (default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. - The weekly view would look like the following:</p> - <pre> - -+------------------------------------+ -| Calendar | -|----------------------------(# 13)--| -| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | -| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | -| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM -| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday -| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM -+------------------------------------+ - - </pre> -<p> - The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel - (<span class="emp"># 13</span> meaning it is the 13th week of the year - in the above example). The seven days of the current week are displayed - in column. Each day is divided into slices of 4 hours each (6 slices in - total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a different color if - an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. -</p> - -<p> - In the appointment panel, one can notice the <span - class="emp">'(|)'</span> sign just in front of the date. - This indicates the current phase of the moon. - Depending on which is the current phase, the following signs can be - seen: - <dl class="compact"> - <dt>'<code> |) </code>':</dt> - <dd>first quarter</dd> - <dt>'<code> (|) </code>':</dt> - <dd>full moon</dd> - <dt>'<code> (| </code>':</dt> - <dd>last quarter</dd> - <dt>'<code> | </code>':</dt> - <dd>new moon</dd> - <dt>no sign:</dt> - <dd>phase of the moon does not correspond to any of - the above ones</dd> - </dl> - </p> - <p> - At the very bottom of the screen there is a status bar, which - indicates the possible actions and the corresponding keystrokes.</p> - <p> - Just above this status bar is the notify-bar, which indicates - from left to right : the current date, the current time, the - calendar file currently in use (apts on the above example, which - is the default calendar file, see the following section), and - the next appointment within the upcoming 24 hours. Here it says - that it will be lunch time in one hour and twenty minutes.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Some actions, such as editing or adding an item, - require to type in some text. This is done with the help of - the built-in input line editor.</p> - <p> - Within this editor, if a line is longer than the screen width, - a '>', '*', or '<' character is displayed in the last - column indicating that there are more character after, before and - after, or before the current position, respectively. The line is - scrolled horizontally as necessary.</p> - <p> - Moreover, some editing commands are bound to particular control - characters. Hereafter are indicated the available editing commands - ('^' stands for the control key): - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>^a</code>:</dt> - <dd>moves the cursor to the beginning of the input line</dd> - <dt><code>^b</code>:</dt> - <dd>moves the cursor backward</dd> - <dt><code>^d</code>:</dt> - <dd>deletes one character forward</dd> - <dt><code>^e</code>:</dt> - <dd>moves the cursor to the end of the input line</dd> - <dt><code>^f</code>:</dt> - <dd>moves the cursor forward</dd> - <dt><code>^h</code>:</dt> - <dd>deletes one character backward</dd> - <dt><code>^k</code>:</dt> - <dd>deletes the input from the cursor to the end of the line</dd> - <dt><code>ESCAPE</code>:</dt> - <dd>cancels the editing</dd> - </dl> -</p> - -<h2>4.3 Background mode<a name="basics_daemon"></a></h2> - -<p>When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu -(see <a href="#options_notify">Notify-bar settings</a>), <code>calcurse</code> will stay -in background when the user interface is not running. In background mode, -<code>calcurse</code> checks for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined -notification command when necessary. When the user interface is started again, -the daemon automatically stops.</p> - -<p><code>calcurse</code> background activity can be logged (set the -<code>notify-daemon_log</code> variable in the notification configuration -<a href="#options_notify">menu</a>), and in that case, information about the daemon -start and stop time, reminders' command launch time, signals received... will be written -in the <code>daemon.log</code> file (see section <a href="#basics_files">files</a>).</p> - -<p> -Using the <code>--status</code> command line option (see section -<a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">Command line arguments</a>), -one can know if <code>calcurse</code> is currently running in background or not. -If the daemon is running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of -the daemon process will be shown): -<pre>calcurse is running in background (pid 14536)</pre> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> -To stop the daemon, just send the <code>TERM</code> signal to it, using a command such as: -<code>'kill daemon_pid'</code>, where <span class="emp">daemon_pid</span> is the process id -of the daemon (14536 in the above example). -</p> - - -<h2>4.4 <code>calcurse</code> files<a name="basics_files"></a></h2> -<p> - The following structure is created in your <code>$HOME</code> - directory (or in the directory you specified with the -D option) - the first time <code>calcurse</code> is run :</p> - <pre> -$HOME/.calcurse/ - |___notes/ - |___conf - |___keys - |___apts - |___todo - </pre> - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>notes/</code>:</dt> - <dd>this subdirectory contains descriptions of the notes - which are attached to appointments, events or todos. One text file is - created per note, whose name is built using mkstemp(3) and should be - unique, but with no relation with the corresponding item's description.</dd> - <dt><code>conf</code>:</dt> - <dd>this file contains the user configuration</dd> - <dt><code>keys</code>:</dt> - <dd>this file contains the user-defined key bindings</dd> - <dt><code>apts</code>:</dt> - <dd>this file contains all of the events and user's appointments</dd> - <dt><code>todo</code>:</dt> - <dd>this file contains the todo list</dd> - </dl> - - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification - configuration menu, the extra file <code>daemon.log</code> will appear - in calcurse data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity - when running in background. - </p> - -<h2>4.5 Import/Export capabilities<a name="basics_import_export"></a></h2> -<p> - The import and export capabilities offered by <code>calcurse</code> - are described below. -</p> - -<h3>4.5.1 Import<a name="basics_import"></a></h3> -<p> - Data in icalendar format as described in the rfc2445 specification - (see <a href="#links_others">links</a> section below) can be imported - into calcurse. Calcurse ical parser is based on version 2.0 of this - specification, but for now on, only a subset of it is supported. -</p> -<p> - The following icalendar properties are handled by calcurse: - <ul> - <li><code>VTODO</code> items:<br> - "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION"</li> - <li><code>VEVENT</code> items:<br> - "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", - "DESCRIPTION"</li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - The icalendar "DESCRIPTION" property will be converted into calcurse format - by adding a note to the item. If a "VALARM" property is found, the item - will be flagged as important and the user will get a notification (this is - only applicable to appointments). -</p> -<p> - Here are the properties that are not implemented: - <ul> - <li>negative time durations are not taken into account (item is skipped)</li> - <li>some recurence frequences are not recognize:<br> - "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / "HOURLY"</li> - <li>some recurrence keywords are not recognized - (all those starting with 'BY'):<br> - "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY"<br> - "BYYEARDAY" / "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS"<br> - plus "WKST"</li> - <li>the recurrence exception keyword "EXRULE" is not recognized</li> - <li>timezones are not taken into account</li> - </ul> -</p> - -<h3>4.5.2 Export<a name="basics_export"></a></h3> -<p> - Two possible export formats are available: <code>ical</code> and - <code>pcal</code> (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below - to find out about those formats). -</p> - -<h2>4.6 Online help<a name="basics_help"></a></h2> -<p> - At any time, the built-in help system can be invoked by - pressing the '?' key. Once viewing the help screens, - informations on a specific command can be accessed by pressing - the keystroke corresponding to that command. - </p> - -<h1>5. Options<a name="options"></a></h1> -<p> - All of the <code>calcurse</code> parameters are configurable from the - Configuration menu available when pressing 'C'. You are then - driven to a submenu with five possible choices : pressing 'C' - again will lead you to the Color scheme configuration, - pressing 'L' allows you to choose the layout of the main - <code>calcurse</code> screen (in other words, where to put the three - different panels on screen), pressing 'G' permits you to choose between - different general options, pressing 'K' opens the key bindings configuration - menu, and last you can modify the notify-bar settings by pressing 'N'.</p> - -<h2>5.1 General options<a name="options_general"></a></h2> -<p> - These options control <code>calcurse</code> general behavior, - as described below:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>auto_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd>This option allows to automatically save the user's data - (if set to <span class="emp">yes</span>) when quitting. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">warning:</span> - No data will be automatically saved if - <code>auto_save</code> is set to <span class="emp">no</span>. - This means the user must press 'S' (for saving) in order to - retrieve its modifications.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>periodic_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>If different from '0', user's data will be automatically - saved every <span class="emp">periodic_save</span> minutes. - When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks - (i.e. '<code>**</code>') will appear on the top right-hand side - of the screen).</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>confirm_quit</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd>If set to <span class="emp">yes</span>, confirmation is required before - quitting, otherwise pressing 'Q' will cause <code>calcurse</code> - to quit without prompting for user confirmation. - </dd> - <dt><code>confirm_delete</code> (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd>If this option is set to <span class="emp">yes</span>, pressing 'D' for - deleting an item (either a <span class="emp">todo</span>, - <span class="emp">appointment</span>, - or <span class="emp">event</span>), will lead to a prompt asking for user - confirmation before removing the selected item from the list. - Otherwise, no confirmation will be needed before deleting the item. - </dd> - <dt><code>skip_system_dialogs</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd>Setting this option to <span class="emp">yes</span> will result in - skipping the - system dialogs related to the saving and loading of data. - This can be useful to speed up the input/output processes. - </dd> - <dt><code>skip_progress_bar</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd>If set to <span class="emp">yes</span>, this will cause the disappearing of the - progress bar which is usually shown when saving data to file. - If set to <span class="emp">no</span>, this bar will be displayed, together with - the name of the file being saved - (see section <a href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> files</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>calendar_default_view</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>If set to <span class="emp">0</span>, the monthly calendar view will be - displayed by default otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed. - </dd> - <dt><code>week_begins_on_monday</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd>One can choose between Monday and Sunday as the first day of the - week. If the option <code>week_begins_on_monday</code> is set to - <span class="emp">yes</span>, Monday will be first in the calendar view. Else if - the option is set to <span class="emp">no</span>, then Sunday will be the first - day of the week.</dd> - <dt><code>output_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%D</span>)</dt> - <dd>This option indicates the format to be used when displaying dates - in non-interactive mode. Using the default values, dates are displayed the - following way: <span class="emp">mm/dd/aa</span>. - You can see all of the possible formats by typing <code>man 3 strftime</code> - inside a terminal.</dd> - <dt><code>input_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">1</span>)</dt> - <dd>This option indicates the format that will be used to enter dates in - <span class="emp">calcurse</span>. Four choices are available: - <ol> - <li>mm/dd/yyyy</li> - <li>dd/mm/yyyy</li> - <li>yyyy/mm/dd</li> - <li>yyyy-mm-dd</li> - </ol> - </dd> - </dl> - - -<h2>5.2 Key bindings<a name="options_keys"></a></h2> -<p> - One can define it's own keybindings within the 'Keys' configuration - menu. The default keys look like the one used by the <code>vim</code> - editor, especially the displacement keys. Anyway, within this - configuration menu, users can redefine all of the keys available from - within calcurse's user interface.</p> -<p> - To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will - apply. Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new - one. You will then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new - binding. It is possible to define more than one key binding for a single - action.</p> -<p> - An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding - is not already set for another action. In that case, you will be asked - to choose a different one. Another check is done when exiting from this - menu, to make sure all possible actions have a key associated with it.</p> -<p> - The following keys can be used to define bindings: - <ul> - <li>lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as 'a', 'Z', '0'</li> - <li>CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters</li> - <li>escape, horizontal tab, and space keys</li> - <li>arrow keys (up, down, left, and right)</li> - <li>'HOME' and 'END' keys</li> - </ul> </p> -<p> - While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for - each one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the - highlighted action is used for.</p> - - -<h2>5.3 Color themes<a name="options_colors"></a></h2> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> color theme can be customized to suit user's - needs. To change the default theme, the configuration page - displays possible choices for foreground and background colors. - Using arrows or calcurse displacement keys to move, and 'X' or space - to select a color, user can preview the theme which will be applied. - It is possible to keep the terminal's default colors by selecting the - corresponding choice in the list.</p> -<p> - The chosen color theme will then be applied to the panel borders, - to the titles, to the keystrokes, and to general informations - displayed inside status bar. A black and white theme is also - available, in order to support non-color terminals.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Notes:</span> - Depending on your terminal type and on the value of the - <code>$TERM</code> environnement variable, color could or - could not be supported. An error message will appear if you - try to change colors whereas your terminal does not support - this feature. - If you do know your terminal supports colors but could - not get <code>calcurse</code> to display them, try to set your - <code>$TERM</code> variable to another value (such as - <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> for instance). - </p> - - -<h2>5.4 Layout configuration<a name="options_layout"></a></h2> -<p> - The layout corresponds to the position of the panels inside - <code>calcurse</code> screen. The default layout makes the - calendar panel to be displayed on the top-right corner of the - terminal, the todo panel on the bottom-right corner, while the - appointment panel is displayed on the left hand-side of the - screen (see the figure in section - <a href="#basics_interface_interactive">Interactive mode</a> - for an exemple of the default layout). - By choosing another layout in the configuration screen, user - can customize <code>calcurse</code> appearence to best suit - his needs by placing the different panels where needed.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to modify the layout configuration:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>layout</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout - configuration screen for the description of the available layouts).</dd> - </dl> - -<h2>5.5 Sidebar configuration<a name="options_sidebar"></a></h2> -<p> - The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: - the calendar and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo - list or the appointment list.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>side-bar_width</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar.</dd> - </dl> - - -<h2>5.6 Notify-bar settings<a name="options_notify"></a></h2> -<p> - The following options are used to modify the notify-bar behavior:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>notify-bar_show</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd>This option indicates if you want the notify-bar to be displayed - or not.</dd> - <dt><code>notify-bar_date</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%a %F</span>)</dt> - <dd>With this option, you can specify the format to be used to - display the current date inside the notification bar. You can - see all of the possible formats by typing <code>man 3 strftime</code> - inside a terminal.</dd> - <dt><code>notify-bar_time</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%T</span>)</dt> - <dd>With this option, you can specify the format to be used to - display the current time inside the notification bar. You can - see all of the possible formats by typing <code>man 3 strftime</code> - inside a terminal.</dd> - <dt><code>notify-bar_warning</code> - (default: <span class="emp">300</span>)</dt> - <dd>When there is an appointment which is flagged as 'important' - within the next 'notify-bar_warning' - seconds, the display of that appointment inside the notify-bar - starts to blink. - Moreover, the command defined by the <code>notify-bar_command</code> - option will be launched. - That way, the user is warned and knows there - will be soon an upcoming appointment. - </dd> - <dt><code>notify-bar_command</code> - (default: <span class="emp">printf '\a'</span>)</dt> - <dd>This option indicates which command is to be launched when there is an - upcoming appointment flagged as 'important'. This command will be - passed to the user's shell which will interpret it. To know what shell - must be used, the content of the <code>$SHELL</code> environment variable - is used. If this variable is not set, <code>/bin/sh</code> is used - instead. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Example:</span> - Say the <code>mail</code> command is available on - the user's system, one can use the following command to get notified by - mail of an upcoming appointment (the appointment description will also - be mentioned in the mail body):</p> - <code> -calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] upcoming appointment!" user@host.com - </code> - </dd> - <dt><code>notify-daemon_enable</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd>If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning <code>calcurse</code> - will run into background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the - notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More details - can be found in section <a href="#basics_daemon">'Background mode'</a>. - </dd> - <dt><code>notify-daemon_log</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd>If set to yes, <code>calcurse</code> daemon activity will be logged (see section - <a href="#basics_files">files</a>). - </dd> - </dl> - -<h1>6. Known bugs<a name="known_bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Incorrect highlighting of items appear when using calcurse - black and white theme together with a <code>$TERM</code> - variable set to <span class="emp">xterm-color</span>. - To fix this bug, and as advised by Thomas E. Dickey - (<code>xterm</code> maintainer), <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> - should be used instead of <span class="emp">xterm-color</span> to set - the <code>$TERM</code> variable:</p> - <blockquote class="rq"> - "The xterm-color value for $TERM is a bad choice for XFree86 xterm - because it is commonly used for a terminfo entry which happens to - not support bce. Use the xterm-xfree86 entry which is distributed - with XFree86 xterm (or the similar one distributed with ncurses)." - </blockquote> - -<h1>7. Reporting bugs and feedback<a name="bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Please send bug reports and feedback to:</p> - <pre>calcurse .at. culot .dot. org</pre> -<p> - or to the author:</p> - <pre>frederic .at. culot .dot. org</pre> - -<h1>8. How to contribute?<a name="contribute"></a></h1> -<p> - If you would like to contribute to the project, - you can first send your feedback on what you like or dislike, - and if there are features you miss in <code>calcurse</code>. - For now on, possible contributions concern the translation - of <code>calcurse</code> messages and documentation. </p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - any help in getting <code>calcurse</code> - internationalized would be very welcomed, but before - contributing, send a mail to - <code>calcurse-i18n .at. culot .dot. org</code> to know if someone - already started the translation process into your language.</p> - -<h2>8.1 Translating documentation<a name="contribute_documentation"></a></h2> -<p> - The <span class="emp">doc/</span> directory of the source package already - contains translated version of <code>calcurse</code> - manual. However, if the manual is not yet available into your - native language, it would be appreciated if you could help - translating it.</p> -<p> - To do so, just copy one of the existing manual - file to <code>manual_XX.html</code>, where <span class="emp">XX</span> - identifies your language. Then translate this newly created - file and send it to the author (see <a href="#bugs">Reporting - bugs and feeback</a>), so that it can be included in the - next <code>calcurse</code> release.</p> - -<h2>8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n<a name="contribute_i18n"></a></h2> -<p> - As already mentioned, <code>gettext</code> utilities are used - by <code>calcurse</code> to produce multi-lingual - messages. This section provides informations about how to - translate those messages into your native language. However, - this howto is deliberately incomplete, focusing on working - with <code>gettext</code> for <code>calcurse</code> - specifically. For more comprehensive informations or to grasp - the Big Picture of Native Language Support, you should refer - to the <code>GNU gettext</code> manual at:</p> - <pre>http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/ </pre> -<p> - Basically, three different people get involved in the - translation chain: coders, language coordinator, and - translators. After a quick overview of how things work, the - translator tasks will be described hereafter.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.1 Overview<a name="contribute_i18n_overview"></a></h3> -<p> - To be able to display texts in the native language of the - user, two steps are required: <span class="emp">internationalization</span> - (i18n) and <span class="emp">localization</span> (l10n).</p> -<p> - i18n is about making - <code>calcurse</code> support multiple languages. It is - performed by coders, who will mark translatable texts and - provide a way to display them translated at runtime.</p> -<p> - l10n is - about making the i18n'ed <code>calcurse</code> adapt to the - specific language of the user, ie translating the strings - previously marked by the developers, and setting the - environment correctly for <code>calcurse</code> to use the - result of this translation.</p> -<p> - So, translatable strings are first marked by the coders within - the <code>C</code> source files, then gathered in a template - file (<span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> - the <span class="emp">pot</span> extension - meaning <span class="emp">portable object template</span>). The content of - this template file is then merged with the translation files - for each language (<span class="emp">fr.po</span> for french, for instance - - with <span class="emp">po</span> standing for <span class="emp">portable object</span>, ie - meant to be read and edited by humans). A given translation - team will take this file, translate its strings, and send it - back to the developers. At compilation time, a binary version - of this file (for efficiency reasons) will be produced - (<span class="emp">fr.mo</span> - <span class="emp">mo</span> stands for - <span class="emp">machine - object</span>, ie meant to be read by programs), and then - installed. Then <code>calcurse</code> will use this file at - runtime, translating the strings according to the locale - settings of the user.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.2 Translator tasks<a name="contribute_i18n_translator"></a></h3> -<p> - Suppose someone wants to initiate the translation of a new - language. Here are the steps to follow:</p> - <ul> - <li>First, find out what the locale name is. For instance, for - french, it is 'fr_FR', or simply 'fr'. This is the value the - user will have to put in his <code>LC_ALL</code> environment - variable for software to be translated (see <a - href="#basics_invocation_variable">Environment variable for - i18n</a>).</li> - <li>Then, go into the <span class="emp">po/</span> directory, and create a new po-file - from the template file using the following command: - <code>'msginit -i calcurse.pot -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator'</code> - If you do not have <code>msginit</code> installed on your - system, simply copy the <span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> file to - <span class="emp">fr.po</span> and edit the header by hand.</li> - </ul> -<p> - Now, having this <span class="emp">fr.po</span> file, the translator is ready - to begin.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.3 po-files<a name="contribute_i18n_po-files"></a></h3> -<p> - The format of the po-files is quite simple. Indeed, po-files - are made of four things:</p> - <ol> - <li><span class="emp">location lines:</span> tells you where the strings can - be seen (name of file and line number), in case you need to - see a bit of context.</li> - <li><span class="emp">msgid lines:</span> the strings to translate.</li> - <li><span class="emp">msgstr lines:</span> the translated strings.</li> - <li><span class="emp">lines prefixed with '#':</span> comments (some with a - special meaning, as we will see below).</li> - </ol> -<p> - Basically, all you have to do is fill the <span class="emp">msgstr</span> - lines with the translation of the above <span class="emp">msgid</span> - line.</p> -<p> - <span class="valorise">A few notes:</span> - <dl> - <dt><span class="emp">Fuzzy strings</span></dt> - <dd>You will meet strings marked with a <code>"#, fuzzy"</code> - comment. <code>calcurse</code> won't use the translations of - such strings until you do something about them. A string - being fuzzy means either that the string has already been - translated but has since been changed in the sources of the - program, or that this is a new string for which - <code>gettext</code> made a 'wild guess' for the translation, - based on other strings in the file. It means you have to - review the translation. Sometimes, the original string has - changed just because a typo has been fixed. In this case, you - won't have to change anything. But sometimes, the translation - will no longer be accurate and needs to be changed. Once you - are done and happy with the translation, just remove the - <code>"#, fuzzy"</code> line, and the translation will be used - again in <code>calcurse</code>.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">c-format strings and special sequences</span></dt> - <dd>Some strings have the following comment: <code>"#, - c-format"</code>. This tells that parts of the string to - translate have a special meaning for the program, and that you - should leave them alone. For instance, %-sequences, like - <code>"%s"</code>. These means that <code>calcurse</code> will - replace them with another string. So it is important it - remains. There are also \-sequences, like <code>\n</code> or - <code>\t</code>. Leave them, too. The former represents an end - of line, the latter a tabulation.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Translations can be wrapped</span></dt> - <dd>If lines are too long, you can just break them like this: - <pre> -msgid "" -"some very long line" -"another line" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">po-file header</span></dt> - <dd>At the very beginning of the po-file, the first string form a - header, where various kind of information has to be filled - in. Most important one is the charset. It should resemble - <pre> -"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" - </pre> - You should also fill in the Last-Translator field, so that - potential contributors can contact you if they want to join - you in the translation team, or have remarks/typo fixes to - give about the translations. You can either just give your - name/nick, or add an email address, for exemple: - <pre> -"Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Comments</span></dt> - <dd>Adding comments (lines begining with the '#' character) can be - a good way to point out problems or translation difficulties - to proofreaders or other members of your team.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Strings size</span></dt> - <dd><code>calcurse</code> is a curses/console program, thus it can - be heavily dependant on the terminal size (number of - columns). You should think about this when translating. Often, - a string must fit into a single line (standard length is 80 - characters). Don't translate blindly, try to look where your - string will be displayed to adapt your translation.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">A few useful tools</span></dt> - <dd>The po-file format is very simple, and the file can be edited - with a standard text editor. But if you prefer, there are few - specialized tools you may find convenient for translating: - <ul> - <li><code>poEdit</code> (<a - href="http://www.poedit.org/" target="_blank"> - http://www.poedit.org/</a>)</li> - <li><code>KBabel</code> (<a - href="http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/" target="_blank"> - http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/</a>)</li> - <li><code>GTranslator</code> (<a - href="http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/" target="_blank"> - http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/</a>)</li> - <li><code>Emacs</code> po mode</li> - <li><code>Vim</code> po mode</li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><span class="emp">And finally</span></dt> - <dd>I hope you'll have fun contributing to a more - internationalized world. :) If you have any more questions, - don't hesitate to contact me at - <span class="emp">frederic .at. culot .dot. org</span>.</dd> - </dl> - - -<h1>9. Links<a name="links"></a></h1> -<p> - This section contains links and references that may be of - interest to you.</p> - -<h2>9.1 <code>calcurse</code> homepage<a name="links_homepage"></a></h2> -<p> - The <code>calcurse</code> homepage can be found at </p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse</pre> - -<h2>9.2 <code>calcurse</code> announce list<a name="links_list"></a></h2> -<p> - If you are interested in the project and want to be warned - when a new release comes out, you can subscribe to the - <code>calcurse</code> announce list. In doing so, you will - receive an email as soon as a new feature appears in - <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -<p> - To subscribe to this list, send a message to - <span class="emp">calcurse-announce .at. culot .dot. org</span> - with "subscribe" in the subject field.</p> - -<h2>9.3 <code>calcurse</code> RSS feed<a name="links_rss"></a></h2> -<p> - Another possibility to get warned when new releases come out - is to follow the RSS feed at:</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml</pre> -<p> - This RSS feed is updated each time a new version of calcurse is - available, describing newly added features.</p> - -<h2>9.4 Other links<a name="links_others"></a></h2> -<p> - You may want to look at the ical format specification (rfc2445) at: - <pre>http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445</pre> -<p> - The pcal project page can be found at: - <pre>http://pcal.sourceforge.net/</pre> - -<h1>10. Thanks<a name="thanks"></a></h1> -<p> - Its time now to thank other people without whom this program - would not exist! So here is a list of contributing persons I - would like to thank : - <ul> - <li>Alex for its patches, help and advices with <code>C</code> programming</li> - <li>Gwen for testing and general discussions about how to - improve <code>calcurse</code></li> - <li>Herbert for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for FreeBSD</li> - <li>Zul for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for NetBSD</li> - <li>Wain, Steffen and Ronald for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for Archlinux</li> - <li>Kevin, Ryan, and fEnIo for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for Debian - and Ubuntu</li> - <li>Pascal for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for Slackware</li> - <li>Alexandre and Markus for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for Mac OsX - and Darwin</li> - <li>Igor for packaging <code>calcurse</code> for ALT Linux</li> - <li>Joel for its calendar script which inspired <code>calcurse</code> - calendar view</li> - <li>Michael Schulz and Chris M. for the german translation of - <code>calcurse</code> and its manual</li> - <li>Jose Lopez for the spanish translation of - <code>calcurse</code> and its manual</li> - <li>Neil Williams for the english translation</li> - <li>Leandro Noferini for the italian translation</li> - <li>Tony for its patch which helped improving the - recur_item_inday() function, and for implementing the date format configuration - options</li> - <li>Jeremy Roon for the dutch translation</li> - <li>Erik Saule for its patch implementing the '-N', '-s', '-S', '-r' and '-D' flags</li> - <li>people who write softwares I like and which inspired me, - especially : - <ul> - <li><code>vim</code> for the displacement keys</li> - <li><code>orpheus</code> and <code>abook</code> for documentation</li> - <li><code>pine</code> and <code>aptitude</code> - for the text user interface</li> - <li><code>tmux</code> for coding style</li> - </ul></li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - And last, many many thanks to all of the <code>calcurse</code> - users who sent me their feedback.</p> - -<div class="footer"> - Copyright © 2004-2010 Frédéric Culot<br> - Calcurse version 2.8 - Last change: March 29, 2010<br> -</div> -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/doc/manual_es.html b/doc/manual_es.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2787b2c..0000000 --- a/doc/manual_es.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1347 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<!-- -/* - * $calcurse: manual_es.html,v 1.25 2010/03/29 18:18:02 culot Exp $ - * - * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - * - */ ---> - -<html> -<head> -<title>CALCURSE documentación</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> -<style type="text/css" media="all"> - @import url(manual.css); -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div id="mainContent"> - -<h1 id="title"> -<span class="main">CALCURSE - organizador basado en modo texto</span></h1> - -<div class="warn"> -<div class="todo"> -<h1>Abstract</h1> This manual describes <code>calcurse</code> functionnalities, -and how to use them. The installation from source is first described, together -with the available command line arguments. The user interface -is then presented, with all of the customizable options that change -<code>calcurse</code> behavior. Last, bug reporting procedure is explained, as -well as the way one can contribute to <code>calcurse</code> development. -</div> -</div> - -<div id="toc"> -<h1>Tabla de Contenidos</h1> -<ul> - <li><a href="#intro">1. Introducción</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview">2. Descripción</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#overview_history">2.1 Historia</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview_features">2.2 Características importantes</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install">3. Instalación</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements">3.1 Requerimientos</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_ncurses">3.1.1 librería <code>ncurses</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_gettext">3.1.2 librería <code>gettext</code></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install_process">3.2 Proceso de instalación</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics">4. <code>calcurse</code> básicos</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation">4.1 Invocación</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">4.1.1 Argumentos de la linea de comandos</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_variable">4.1.2 Variable de entorno para i18n</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_environment"><span class="todo">4.1.3 Other environment - variables</span></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface">4.2 Interfaz de usuario</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_noninteractive">4.2.1 Modo no-interactivo</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_interactive">4.2.2 Modo interactivo</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_daemon"><span class="todo">4.3 Background mode</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_files">4.4 Archivos de <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_import_export"><span class="todo">4.5 Import/Export capabilities</span></a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_import"><span class="todo">4.5.1 Import</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_export"><span class="todo">4.5.2 Export</span></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_help">4.6 Ayuda en linea</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#options">5. Opciones</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#options_general">5.1 Opciones generales</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_keys"><span class="todo">5.2 Key bindings</span></a> - <li><a href="#options_colors">5.3 Color (temas)</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_layout">5.4 Configuración de la disposición</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_sidebar"><span class="todo">5.5 Sidebar configuration</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#options_notify">5.6 Ajustes de la barra de notificaciones</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#known_bugs">6. Bugs conocidos</a></li> - <li><a href="#bugs">7. Informar de bugs y comentarios</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute">8. żComo contribuir?</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_documentation">8.1 Traduciendo la documentación</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n">8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_overview">8.2.1 Descripción</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_translator">8.2.2 Tareas del traductor</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_po-files">8.2.3 Archivos-po</a></li> - </ul></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#links">9. Enlaces</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#links_homepage">9.1 Pagina web de <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_list">9.2 Lista de anuncios de <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_rss">9.3 <code>calcurse</code> RSS feed</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_others"><div class="todo">9.4 Other links</div></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#thanks">10. Gracias a ...</a></li> -</ul> -</div> - -<h1>1. Introducción<a name="intro"></a></h1> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> es un calendario y organizador de tareas personal basado en - modo texto. Te ayuda a mantener un seguimiento de tus eventos, citas y tareas diarias. - Un sistema de notificacion recuerda al usuario sus proximas citas y la interfaz de - usuario basanda en ncurses puede ser personalizada para cubrir las necesidades del usuario. - Todos los comandos están documentados a través de un sistema de ayuda en linea. -</p> - -<h1>2. Descripción<a name="overview"></a></h1> -<h2>2.1 Historia<a name="overview_history"></a></h2> -<p> - Comencé a pensar en este proyecto cuando estaba acabando mi doctorado - en Astrofísica... Empezaba a ser un poco complicado el organizarme - y realmente necesitaba una buena herramienta que me ayudase - en esa difícil tarea ;-) -</p> -<p> - Me gustan los programas que utilizan las interfaces de - usuario en modo texto porque son simples, rápidos y - eficientes, por eso pensé en programar un calendario simple en - ese tipo de interfaz. Por otra parte, esperaba aprender el - lenguaje <code>C</code> que había utilizado solo a ratos - durante mi época de estudiante. Por eso pensé que podía ser un - buen proyecto para empezar a estar organizado y Ą aprender algunas - cosas sobre <code>C</code> ! -</p> -<p> - Por desgracia acabe mi doctorado antes de - acabar <code>calcurse</code>, pero de todas formas aun quería - trabajar en el y esperaba que pudiese ser de ayuda a otra gente. - Y aquí esta... -</p> -<p> - Pero żpor que 'calcurse'? Bien, es simplemente una concatenación - de CALendar y nCURSEs, el nombre de la librería utilizada para - construir la interfaz de usuario. -</p> - -<h2>2.2 Características importantes<a name="overview_features"></a></h2> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> es multi-plataforma e intenta ser ligero, - rápido y fiable. Esta hecho para ser usado en consola o terminal, - tanto en local como en una maquina remota a través de ssh o una - conexión similar. -</p> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> puede funcionar de dos modos diferentes : - modo interactivo o no-interactivo. El primero permite a un usuario - ver su organizador en casi cualquier maquina gracias a la interfaz - basada en modo texto. El segundo modo permite crear recordatorios - de una forma muy fácil, únicamente ańadiendo <code>calcurse</code>, - con los argumentos apropiados en la linea de comando, en el crontab - o mediante un sell init script. -</p> -<p> - Por otra parte, <code>calcurse</code> fue creado pensando en el usuario - final y trata de ser lo mas amigable posible. Esto significa un - completo sistema de ayuda en linea, conjuntamente con tener todas - las posibles acciones visualizadas en todo momento en la barra de - estado. La interfaz de usuario también es configurable y uno puede - elegir entre combinaciones de colores y disposiciones. -<span class="todo">Key bindings are also configurable, to fit everyone's needs.</span> - Finalmente, un sistema de notificacion recuerda al usuario sus proximas citas. -<span class="todo">The reminders are sent even if the user's interface -is not running, as calcurse is able to run in background.</span> -</p> - -<h1>3. Instalación<a name="install"></a></h1> -<h2>3.1 Requerimientos<a name="install_requirements"></a></h2> -<h3>3.1.1 librería <code>ncurses</code><a name="install_requirements_ncurses"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> requiere solo un compilador <code>C</code>, como - <code>cc</code> o <code>gcc</code>, y la librería <code>ncurses</code>. - Sería muy sorprendente no tener una librería <code>ncurses</code> - valida ya instalada en tu ordenador, pero si no la tienes, puedes - encontrarla en la siguiente dirección :</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/</pre> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - It is also possible to link <code>calcurse</code> against the - <code>ncursesw</code> library (ncurses with support for unicode). - However, UTF-8 is not yet supported by <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -</div> - -<h3>3.1.2 librería <code>gettext</code><a name="install_requirements_gettext"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> soporta internacionalización - (de aquí en adelante <span class="emp">i18n</span>) con las - utilidades <code>gettext</code>. - Esto significa que <code>calcurse</code> puede producir - mensajes en diferentes lenguas si esta compilado con el soporte - para lengua nativa (p.e. <span class="emp">NLS</span>). -</p> -<p> - Por otra parte, - <span class="emp">NLS</span> es opcional, si tu no quieres tener soporte - para esta característica, basta con que utilices la opción <code>--disable-nls</code> - en el comando <code>configure</code> (ver la sección <a - href="#install_process">Proceso de instalación</a>). - Para comprobar si las utilidades <code>gettext</code> están - instaladas en tu sistema, puedes buscar el archivo cabecera - <code>libintl.h</code>, por ejemplo :</p> - <pre>locate libintl.h</pre> -<p> - Si este archivo cabecera no se encuentra, entonces puedes obtener - las fuentes de <code>gettext</code> en la siguiente dirección :</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Nota:</span> - Incluso si <code>libintl.h</code> se encuentra en tu - sistema, puede ser necesario especificar su localización durante el <a - href="#install_process">proceso de instalación</a>, utilizando la opción - <code>--with-libintl-prefix</code> en el comando - <code>configure</code>. De hecho, el comando <code>configure</code> - puede fallar al tratar de localizar esta librería si esta instalada en - un lugar infrecuente. -</p> - -<h2>3.2 Proceso de instalación<a name="install_process"></a></h2> -<p> - Primero necesitas descomprimir ( gunzip y untar) el archivo fuente:</p> - <pre>tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz</pre> -<p> - Una vez has resuelto los requisitos y has extraído el archivo, - el proceso de instalación es muy simple y sigue los tres pasos habituales: - <ol> - <li><code>./configure</code></li> - <li><code>make</code></li> - <li><code>make install</code> (puede requerir privilegios de administrador)</li> - </ol> -</p> -<p> - Utiliza <code>./configure --help</code> para obtener una lista de posibles - opciones. -</p> - -<h1>4. <code>calcurse</code> básicos<a name="basics"></a></h1> -<h2>4.1 Invocación (arranque del programa)<a name="basics_invocation"></a></h2> -<h3>4.1.1 Argumentos de la linea de comando<a name="basics_invocation_commandline"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> acepta las siguientes opciones en la - linea de comando (ambas opciones, cortas y largas estan soportadas):</p> - <p> - - <dl> - <dt><code>-a, --appointment</code></dt> - <dd> - Imprime las citas y eventos para el día actual y sale. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> - el calendario desde donde leerán - puede ser especificado usando la opción '-c'.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-c <file>, --calendar <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Especifica el archivo de calendario a usar. - El calendario por defecto es <code>~/.calcurse/apts</code> - (ver la sección <a href="#basics_files">Archivos de <code>calcurse</code></a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>-d <date|num>, --day <date|num></code></dt> - <dd> - Imprime las citas y eventos para la fecha dada o para el numero dado de días - próximos, dependiendo del formato del argumento. - Soporta dos posible formatos : - <ul> - <li>una fecha <span class="todo">(possible formats described below).</span></li> - <li>un numero 'n'.</li> - </ul> - En el primer caso, devolverá la lista de citas y eventos para la fecha especificada - mientras que en el segundo caso devolverá la lista de citas y eventos - para los 'n' próximos días. - Por ejemplo, tecleando <code>calcurse -d 3</code> - mostrara tus citas y eventos para hoy, mańana y pasado mańana. - <div class="todo"> - Possible formats for specifying the date are defined inside the - general configuration menu (see - <a href="#options_general">General options</a>), using the - <code>input_datefmt</code> variable. - </div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> - al igual que para la opción '-a' , el calendario desde donde se - leerán puede ser especificado usando la opción '-c' .</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-D <dir>, --directory <dir></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Specify the data directory to use. This option is - incompatible with -c. If not specified, the - default directory is <code>'~/.calcurse/'</code>. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-h, --help</code></dt> - <dd> - Imprime un breve texto de ayuda describiendo las opciones soportadas en la - linea de comando y sale. - </dd> - <dt><code>-i <file>, --import <file></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Import the icalendar data contained in <code>file</code>. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-n, --next</code></dt> - <dd> - Imprime las citas para las próximas 24 horas y sale. - El tiempo indicado es el numero de horas y minutos que faltan hasta - la proxima cita. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> - el calendario desde donde se leeran las citas puede ser especificado usando la opcion '-c'.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-N, --note</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a' or '-t' flag, also print note content - if one is associated with the displayed item. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-r[num], --range[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Print events and appointments for the num number of - days and exit. If no num is given, a range of 1 day - is considered. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-s[date], --startday[=date]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Print events and appointments from date and exit. - If no date is given, the current day is considered. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-S<regex>, --search=<regex></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a', '-d', '-r', '-s', or '-t' flag, - print only the items having a description that matches the given - regular expression. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>--status</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If - calcurse is running, this will tell if the interactive - mode was launched or if calcurse is running in background. - The process pid will also be indicated. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-t[num], --todo[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Imprime la lista de tareas pendientes ('ToDo') y sale. - Si se especifica la opcion <code>numero</code>, se mostraran todas las tareas pendientes que tengan la prioridad - igual a <code>numero</code>. - <div class="todo"> - The priority number must be between 1 (highest) and 9 (lowest). It is also possible - to specify '0' for the priority, in which case only completed tasks will be shown.</p> - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-v, --version</code></dt> - <dd> - Muestra la versión de <code>calcurse</code> y sale. - </dd> - <dt><code>-x[format], --export[=format]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Export user data to specified format. Events, appointments and - todos are converted and echoed to stdout. - Two possible formats are available: ical and pcal - (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below). - If the optional argument <code>format</code> is not given, - ical format is selected by default. - </div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> - redirecciona la salida standard para exportar los datos a un archivo usando - un comando como este: - <code>$ calcurse --export > my_data.dat</code></p> - </dd> - </dl> - -<h3>4.1.2 Variable de entorno para i18n<a name="basics_invocation_variable"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> puede ser compilado son soporte para lenguaje - nativo (ver <a href="#install_requirements_gettext">librería <code>gettext</code> - </a>). Así, si quieres ver los mensajes en tu lengua nativa, primero comprueba - que esta disponible mirando en el fichero <code>po/LINGUAS</code>. - Este fichero indica la lista de lenguas disponibles mostrando el código de dos - letras correspondiente (por ejemplo, <span class="emp">es</span> sería para espańol). - Si no encuentras tu lengua, tu ayuda seria muy apreciada si pudieses traducir - <code>calcurse</code> (ver la sección <a href="#contribute">żComo puedo - ayudar?</a>.</p> -<p> - Si tu lengua esta disponible, arranca <code>calcurse</code> con el siguiente comando:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=es_ES calcurse</pre> -<p> - donde <span class="emp">es_ES</span> es el nombre locale en este ejemplo, pero puede ser remplazado - por el locale correspondiente a la lengua deseada.</p> -<p> - Debes especificar también tipo de caracteres 'charset' que se usara porque en - algunos casos los acentos podrían no mostrarse correctamente. - Este tipo de caracteres o 'charset' esta indicado al principio del archivo po - correspondiente al lenguaje deseado. Como puedes ver en el archivo es.po - se usa el tipo de caracteres iso-8859-1, entonces puedes iniciar <code>calcurse</code> - utilizando el siguiente comando:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=es_ES.ISO8859-1 calcurse</pre> - -<div class="todo"> -<h3>4.1.3 Other environment variables<a name="basics_invocation_environment"></a></h3> -<p> - The following environment variables affect the way <code>calcurse</code> - operates:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>VISUAL</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies the external editor to use for writing notes. - </dd> - <dt><code>EDITOR</code></dt> - <dd>If the <code>VISUAL</code> environment variable - is not set, then <code>EDITOR</code> will be used as - the default external editor. If none of those variables are set, - then <code>/usr/bin/vi</code> is used instead. - </dd> - <dt><code>PAGER</code></dt> - <dd>Specifies the default viewer to be used for reading notes. - If this variable is not set, then <code>/usr/bin/less</code> is used. - </dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<h2>4.2 Interfaz de usuario<a name="basics_interface"></a></h2> -<h3>4.2.1 Modo no-interactivo<a name="basics_interface_noninteractive"></a></h3> -<p> - Cuando es llamado por lo menos con uno de los siguientes argumentos: - <code>-a</code>, <code>-d</code>, <code>-h</code>, - <code>-n</code>, <code>-t</code>, <code>-v</code>, <code>-x</code>, - <code>calcurse</code> arranca en modo no-interactivo. - Esto significa que se mostrara la información deseada, y - después de esto, <code>calcurse</code> simplemente se cierra y eres - de nuevo devuelto al prompt del shell.</p> -<p> - De esta forma, uno puede ańadir una linea como - <code>'calcurse --todo --appointment'</code> - en el archivo de inicialización de su entorno gráfico (X o consola) para ver, - cuando entras en el sistema; la lista de tareas, citas y eventos - programadas para el día actual.</p> - -<h3>4.2.2 Modo interactivo<a name="basics_interface_interactive"></a></h3> -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to - the default ones, defined when <code>calcurse</code> is launched - for the first time. If those key bindings do not suit user's needs, - it is possible to change them within the keys configuration menu - (see <a href="#options_keys">key bindings</a>).</p> -</div> -<p> - Cuando es llamado sin ningún argumento o solo con la opción - <code>-c</code>, <code>calcurse</code> arranca en modo interactivo. - En este modo, se muestra una interfaz conteniendo tres - paneles diferentes por los cuales puedes navegar usando la tecla - 'TAB' (tabulador), mas una barra de notificaciones, mas una barra - de estado (ver la figura de abajo).</p> - <pre> - - panel de citas y eventos ---. .--- panel de calendario - | | - v v - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - | Citas y eventos || Calendario | - |------------------------------------||----------------------------| - | (|) Abril 6, 2006 || Abril 2006 | - | ||Lun Mar Mie Jue Vie Sab Dom | - | || 1 2 | - | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | - | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | - | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - | || | - | |+----------------------------+ - | |+----------------------------+ - | || Tareas Pendientes | - | ||----------------------------| panel de tareas pendientes - | || | | - | || | | - | || |<--. - | || | - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - |---[ Lun 6-4-2006 | 10:11:43 ]---(citas)----> 01:20 :: comida <---|<--. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ barra de notificaciones - | ? Ayuda R Redibujar H/L -/+1 Dia G Ir a C Config | - | Q Salir S Guardar J/K -/+1 Semana Tab Cambiar vista |<-. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | - | - barra de estado - - </pre> -<p> - El primer panel representa un calendario que permite iluminar un - día en particular, el segundo contiene la lista de citas y eventos - pertenecientes a ese día, y el ultimo contiene una lista - de tareas pendientes (ToDo) pero que no están asignadas a ningún día - especifico.</p> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display - a monthly (default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. - The weekly view would look like the following:</p> - <pre> - -+------------------------------------+ -| Calendar | -|----------------------------(# 13)--| -| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | -| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | -| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM -| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday -| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM -+------------------------------------+ - - </pre> -<p> - The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel - (<span class="emp"># 13</span> meaning it is the 13th week of the year - in the above example). The seven days of the current week are displayed - in column. Each day is divided into slices of 4 hours each (6 slices in - total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a different color if - an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. -</p> -</div> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - In the appointment panel, one can notice the <span class="emp">'(|)'</span> sign - just in front of the date. This indicates the current phase of the moon. - Depending on which is the current phase, the following signs can be - seen:</p> - <dl class="compact"> - <dt>'<code> |) </code>':</dt> - <dd>first quarter</dd> - <dt>'<code> (|) </code>':</dt> - <dd>full moon</dd> - <dt>'<code> (| </code>':</dt> - <dd>last quarter</dd> - <dt>'<code> | </code>':</dt> - <dd>new moon</dd> - <dt>no sign:</dt> - <dd>phase of the moon does not correspond to any of - the above ones</dd> - </dl> -</p> -</div> -<p> - En la parte inferior de la pantalla hay una barra de estado, que - indica las posibles acciones y sus correspondientes atajos de - teclado.</p> -<p> - Justo encima de esta barra de estado esta la barra de notificaciones, que indica - de izquierda a derecha : la fecha actual, la hora actual, el archivo de - calendario actualmente en uso (en el ejemplo de arriba, el de citas, que es - el fichero de calendario por defecto, ver la sección siguiente), y la - cita mas cercana para las proximas 24 horas. En el ejemplo seria una comida - dentro de una hora y 20 minutos.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> - Algunas acciones, como editar o ańadir un elemento, - requieren teclear algo de texto. Esto se hace con la ayuda del editor - incorporado.</p> -<p> - Dentro de este editor, si una linea es mas larga que el ancho de la pantalla, - se mostrara un caracter como '>', '*', o '<' al final de la columna - indicando que hay mas caracteres despues, antes y despues, o antes de la posicion actual, respectivamente. - La linea se movera horizontalmente si es necesario.</p> -<p> - Por otra parte, hay algunos caracteres que se utilizan para editar. - Aqui se indican los comandos de edicion disponibles - ('^' significa la tecla "control"): - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>^a</code>:</dt> - <dd>mueve el cursor al principio de la linea</dd> - <dt><code>^b</code>:</dt> - <dd>mueve el cursor para atras</dd> - <dt><code>^d</code>:</dt> - <dd>borra un caracter por delante</dd> - <dt><code>^e</code>:</dt> - <dd>mueve el cursor al final de la linea</dd> - <dt><code>^f</code>:</dt> - <dd>mueve el cursor para alante</dd> - <dt><code>^h</code>:</dt> - <dd>borra un caracter hacia atras</dd> - <dt><code>^k</code>:</dt> - <dd>borra desde el cursor hasta el final de la linea</dd> - <dt><code>ESCAPE</code></dt> - <dd>b>: cancela la edicion</dd> - </dl> -</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.3 Background mode<a name="basics_daemon"></a></h2> - -<p>When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu -(see <a href="#options_notify">Notify-bar settings</a>), <code>calcurse</code> will stay -in background when the user interface is not running. In background mode, -<code>calcurse</code> checks for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined -notification command when necessary. When the user interface is started again, -the daemon automatically stops.</p> - -<p><code>calcurse</code> background activity can be logged (set the -<code>notify-daemon_log</code> variable in the notification configuration -<a href="#options_notify">menu</a>), and in that case, information about the daemon -start and stop time, reminders' command launch time, signals received... will be written -in the <code>daemon.log</code> file (see section <a href="#basics_files">files</a>).</p> - -<p> -Using the <code>--status</code> command line option (see section -<a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">Command line arguments</a>), -one can know if <code>calcurse</code> is currently running in background or not. -If the daemon is running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of -the daemon process will be shown): -<pre>calcurse is running in background (pid 14536)</pre> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> -To stop the daemon, just send the <code>TERM</code> signal to it, using a command such as: -<code>'kill daemon_pid'</code>, where <span class="emp">daemon_pid</span> is the process id -of the daemon (14536 in the above example). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.4 Archivos de <code>calcurse</code><a name="basics_files"></a></h2> -<p> - La siguiente estructura se crea en tu directorio <code>$HOME</code> - <div class="todo">(or in the directory you specified with the -D option)</div> - la primera vez que se ejecuta <code>calcurse</code> :</p> - <pre> -$HOME/.calcurse/ - |___notes/ - |___conf - |___keys - |___apts - |___todo - </pre> - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>notes/</code>:</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">this subdirectory contains descriptions of the notes - which are attached to appointments, events or todos. One text file is - created per note, whose name is built using mkstemp(3) and should be - unique, but with no relation with the corresponding item's description.</span></dd> - <dt><code>conf</code>:</dt> - <dd>contiene la configuración del usuario.</dd> - <dt><code>keys</code>:</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">this file contains the user-defined key bindings</span></dd> - <dt><code>apts</code>:</dt> - <dd>contiene todos los eventos y citas del usuario.</dd> - <dt><code>todo</code>:</dt> - <dd>contiene la lista de tareas pendientes.</dd> - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification - configuration menu, the extra file <code>daemon.log</code> will appear - in calcurse data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity - when running in background. - </p> -</div> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.5 Import/Export capabilities<a name="basics_import_export"></a></h2> -<p> - The import and export capabilities offered by <code>calcurse</code> - are described below. -</p> - -<h3>4.5.1 Import<a name="basics_import"></a></h3> -<p> - Data in icalendar format as described in the rfc2445 specification - (see <a href="#links_others">links</a> section below) can be imported - into calcurse. Calcurse ical parser is based on version 2.0 of this - specification, but for now on, only a subset of it is supported. -</p> -<p> - The following icalendar properties are handled by calcurse: - <ul> - <li><code>VTODO</code> items:<br> - "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION"</li> - <li><code>VEVENT</code> items:<br> - "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", - "DESCRIPTION"</li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - The icalendar "DESCRIPTION" property will be converted into calcurse format - by adding a note to the item. If a "VALARM" property is found, the item - will be flagged as important and the user will get a notification (this is - only applicable to appointments). -</p> -<p> - Here are the properties that are not implemented: - <ul> - <li>negative time durations are not taken into account (item is skipped)</li> - <li>some recurence frequences are not recognize:<br> - "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / "HOURLY"</li> - <li>some recurrence keywords are not recognized - (all those starting with 'BY'):<br> - "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY"<br> - "BYYEARDAY" / "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS"<br> - plus "WKST"</li> - <li>the recurrence exception keyword "EXRULE" is not recognized</li> - <li>timezones are not taken into account</li> - </ul> -</p> - -<h3>4.5.2 Export<a name="basics_export"></a></h3> -<p> - Two possible export formats are available: <code>ical</code> and - <code>pcal</code> (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below - to find out about those formats). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.6 Ayuda en linea<a name="basics_help"></a></h2> -<p> - En cualquier momento, puedes consultar el sistema de ayuda integrado - presionando la tecla '?'. Una vez en la pantalla de ayuda, - puedes acceder a la información acerca de un comando especifico presionando - la tecla correspondiente a ese comando. -</p> - -<h1>5. Opciones<a name="options"></a></h1> -<p> - Todos los parámetros de <code>calcurse</code> se peden configurar desde - el menú de Configuración disponible pulsando 'C'. Entonces aparecerá un - submenu con tres posibilidades : - pulsando 'C' de nuevo, te lleva a la configuración del esquema de colores. - Pulsando 'L' te permite elegir la disposición de la pantalla principal - de <code>calcurse</code> (en otras palabras, donde colocar los tres diferentes - paneles en pantalla), - <span class="todo">pressing 'K' opens the key bindings configuration - menu,</span> - y finalmente puedes elegir entre diferentes opciones - generales pulsando 'G'. -</p> - -<h2>5.1 Opciones generales<a name="options_general"></a></h2> -<p> - Estas opciones controlan el comportamiento general en la forma - que se describe a continuación:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>auto_guardar</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">si</span>)</dt> - <dd>Esta opción permite salvar automáticamente los datos del usuario - (si esta fijada en <span class="emp">si</span>) cuando se sale - del programa. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">aviso:</span> - Los datos no serán guardados automáticamente si - <code>auto_guardar</code> esta fijada en <span class="emp">no</span>. - Esto significa que el usuario debe pulsar 'S' (guardar) para guardar - sus modificaciones antes de salir.</p> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">periodic_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If different from '0', user's data will be automatically - saved every <span class="emp">periodic_save</span> minutes. - When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks - (i.e. '<code>**</code>') will appear on the top right-hand side - of the screen).</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>confirmar_salir</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">si</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si se fija en <span class="emp">si</span>, se requerirá confirmación antes de salir, - de otra forma cuando se pulse 'Q' causara que <code>calcurse</code> - se cierre sin esperar confirmación del usuario. - </dd> - <dt><code>confirmar_borrar</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">si</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si se fija esta opción en <span class="emp">si</span>, cuando se pulse 'D' para - borrar una anotación (bien sea un <span class="emp">ToDo - (tarea pendiente)</span>, <span class="emp">cita</span>, - o <span class="emp">evento</span>), se requerirá confirmación del usuario antes de borrar - de la lista la anotación seleccionada. - De otra forma, no será necesaria confirmación antes de borrar la anotación. - </dd> - <dt><code>saltar_dialogos_sistema</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd>Fijando esta opción en <span class="emp">si</span> causará la omisión de los diálogos - del sistema relativos al guardado y carga de los datos. - Esto puede ser útil para acelerar los procesos de entrada y salida al programa. - </dd> - <dt><code>saltar_barra_progreso</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si se fija en <span class="emp">si</span>, ocasionara la desaparición de la barra de progreso - que normalmente se muestra cuando se salvan datos a un archivo. - Si esta fijada en <span class="emp">no</span>, se mostrará esta barra, conjuntamente con - el nombre del archivo que se esta guardando - (ver sección <a href="#basics_files">Archivos de <code>calcurse</code></a>). - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">calendar_default_view</span></code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to <span class="emp">0</span>, the monthly calendar view will be - displayed by default otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed.</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>empezar_semana_en_lunes</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">si</span>)</dt> - <dd>Uno puede elegir entre el Lunes o el Domingo como primer día de la semana. - Si la opción <span class="emp">empezar_semana_en_lunes</span> esta fijada en - <span class="emp">si</span>, el Lunes será el primer día de la semana en la vista del calendario. - Por el contrario, si esta opción esta fijada en <span class="emp">no</span>, entonces el Domingo - será el primer día de la semana. - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">output_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%D</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">This option indicates the format to be used when displaying dates - in non-interactive mode. Using the default values, dates are displayed the - following way: <span class="emp">mm/dd/aa</span>. - You can see all of the possible formats by typing <code>man 3 strftime</code> - inside a terminal.</span></dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">input_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">1</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">This option indicates the format that will be used to enter dates in - <span class="emp">calcurse</span>. Four choices are available:</span> - <ol> - <li>mm/dd/yyyy</li> - <li>dd/mm/yyyy</li> - <li>yyyy/mm/dd</li> - <li>yyyy-mm-dd</li> - </ol> - </dd> - - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.2 Key bindings<a name="options_keys"></a></h2> -<p> - One can define it's own keybindings within the 'Keys' configuration - menu. The default keys look like the one used by the <code>vim</code> - editor, especially the displacement keys. Anyway, within this - configuration menu, users can redefine all of the keys available from - within calcurse's user interface.</p> -<p> - To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will - apply. Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new - one. You will then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new - binding. It is possible to define more than one key binding for a single - action.</p> -<p> - An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding - is not already set for another action. In that case, you will be asked - to choose a different one. Another check is done when exiting from this - menu, to make sure all possible actions have a key associated with it.</p> -<p> - The following keys can be used to define bindings: - <ul> - <li>lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as 'a', 'Z', '0'</li> - <li>CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters</li> - <li>escape, horizontal tab, and space keys</li> - <li>arrow keys (up, down, left, and right)</li> - <li>'HOME' and 'END' keys</li> - </ul> </p> -<p> - While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for - each one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the - highlighted action is used for.</p> -</div> - -<h2>5.3 Color (temas)<a name="options_colors"></a></h2> -<p> - El tema de color de <code>calcurse</code> puede se configurado para - cubrir las necesidades del usuario. Para cambiar el tema por defecto, la - pagina de configuracion muestra las posibles opciones para el color de fondo - y del texto. - Usando las teclas de las flechas o las teclas de desplazamiento de calcurse - para moverse y 'X'o la barra espaciadora para seleccionar el color, el usuario - puede previsualizar el tema que se aplicara. - Tambien es posible mantener los colores por defecto del terminal seleccionando - la opcion correspondiente en la lista.</p> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The chosen color theme will then be applied to the panel borders, - to the titles, to the keystrokes, and to general informations - displayed inside status bar. A black and white theme is also - available, in order to support non-color terminals.</p> -</div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Notas:</span> - Dependiendo de tu tipo de terminal y del valor de la variable de - entorno <code>$TERM</code>, color puede no estar soportado. - En ese caso, si intentas cambiar los colores aparecerá un mensaje de error - puesto que tu terminal no soporta esta característica. - Si sabes que tu terminal soporta colores pero no puedes conseguir - que <code>calcurse</code> los muestre, intenta fijar tu variable <code>$TERM</code> - a otro valor. (como por ejemplo <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span>). - </p> - -<h2>5.4 Configuración de la disposición<a name="options_layout"></a></h2> -<p> - La disposición corresponde a la posición de los paneles - dentro de la pantalla de <code>calcurse</code>. La disposición por defecto - hace que el calendario se muestre en la esquina superior derecha - del terminal, el panel de 'ToDo' (tareas pendientes) en la esquina inferior - derecha, mientras que el panel de citas se muestra en la parte izquierda - de la pantalla (ver la figura de la sección <a href="#basics_interface_interactive">Modo interactivo</a> - como ejemplo de la disposición por defecto). - Eligiendo otra disposición en la pantalla de configuración, el usuario puede - modificar la apariencia de <code>calcurse</code> que mejor se adapte a sus - necesidades colocando los diferentes paneles donde los necesite.</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The following option is used to modify the layout configuration:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>layout</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout - configuration screen for the description of the available layouts).</dd> - </dl> -</div> - - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.5 Sidebar configuration<a name="options_sidebar"></a></h2> -<p> - The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: - the calendar and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo - list or the appointment list.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>side-bar_width</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar.</dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<h2>5.6 Ajustes de la barra de notificaciones<a name="options_notify"></a></h2> -<p> - Las siguientes opciones se usan para modificar el comportamiento de la barra de notificaciones:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>mostrar-barra-notificaciones</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">si</span>)</dt> - <dd>Esta opción indica si quieres que se muestre la barra de notificaciones o no. - </dd> - <dt><code>fecha_barra-notificaciones</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">%a %F</span>)</dt> - <dd>Con esta opcion puedes especificar el formato que se usara para mostrar la fecha - actual dentro de la barra de notificaciones. Puedes ver todos los formatos posibles - tecleando <code>man 3 strftime</code> en un terminal. - </dd> - <dt><code>hora_barra-notificaciones</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">%T</span>)</dt> - <dd>Con esta opcion puedes especificar el formato que se usara para mostrar la - hora actual dentro de la barra de notificaciones. Puedes ver todos los formatos - posibles tecleando <code>man 3 strftime</code> dentro de un terminal. - </dd> - <dt><code>alarma_barra-notificaciones</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">300</span>)</dt> - <dd>Cuando tienes una cita dentro de los siguientes 'alarma_barra-notificaciones' - segundos, la referencia a esa cita dentro de la barra de notificaciones - comienza a parpadear. - Además, se lanzara el comando definido por la opcion <span class="emp">comando_barra-notificaciones</span>. - De esta forma, se alerta al usuario y este sabe que - detro de poco tiene una cita. - </dd> - <dt><code>comando_barra-notificaciones</code> - (por defecto: <span class="emp">printf '\a'</span>)</dt> - <dd>Esta opcion indica que comando se lanzara cuando haya una cita proxima marcada como - "inportante". Este comando sera pasado al shell del usuario que lo interpretara. - Para saber que tipo de shell debe usarse, se utilizara el contenido dela variable de - entorno <code>$SHELL</code>. Si esta variable no esta seleccionada, se usara <code>/bin/sh</code>. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Ejemplo:</span> - Digamos que el comando <code>mail</code> esta disponible en el sistema del usuario, uno - puede usar este comando para ser notificado por correo electronico cuando se acerque la cita - (la descripcion de la cita se mencionara en el cuerpo del mensaje):</p> - <code> -calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] upcoming appointment!" user@host.com - </code> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_enable</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning <code>calcurse</code> - will run into background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the - notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More details - can be found in section <a href="#basics_daemon">'Background mode'</a>.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_log</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, <code>calcurse</code> daemon activity will be logged (see section - <a href="#basics_files">files</a></span>). - </dd> - - </dl> - -<h1>6. Bugs conocidos<a name="known_bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Aparece una incorrecta iluminación de las anotaciones cuando se usa el tema - calcurse blanco y negro conjuntamente con la variable <code>$TERM</code> - fijada a <span class="emp">xterm-color</span>. - Para solucionar este bug, y tal como fue anunciado por Thomas E. Dickey - (que mantiene <code>xterm</code>), <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> - puede ser usado en vez de <span class="emp">xterm-color</span> para - fijar la variable <code>$TERM</code>:</p> - <blockquote class="rq"> - "The xterm-color value for $TERM is a bad choice for XFree86 xterm - because it is commonly used for a terminfo entry which happens to - not support bce. Use the xterm-xfree86 entry which is distributed - with XFree86 xterm (or the similar one distributed with ncurses)." - </blockquote> - -<h1>7. Informar de bugs y comentarios<a name="bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Por favor envía los informes de bugs y tus comentarios a :</p> - <pre>calcurse @ culot . org</pre> -<p> - o al autor:</p> - <pre>frederic @ culot . org</pre> - -<h1>8. żComo contribuir?<a name="contribute"></a></h1> -<p> - Si te gustaría contribuir al proyecto, puedes enviar tus comentarios - acerca de lo que te gusta o no te gusta, y si hay alguna - funcionalidad que echas de menos en <code>calcurse</code>. - Por ahora, las posibles contribuciones están limitadas a la traducción - de la documentación y mensajes de error de <code>calcurse</code>. </p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> - Cualquier ayuda para la internacionalización de <code>calcurse</code> - será muy bienvenida, pero antes de contribuir envía en email a : - <code>calcurse-i18n @ culot . org</code> para saber si alguien ha empezado ya - el proceso de traducción a tu lengua.</p> - -<h2>8.1 Traduciendo la documentación<a name="contribute_documentation"></a></h2> -<p> - El directorio <span class="emp">doc/</span> del paquete fuente ya contiene versiones traducidas - del manual de <code>calcurse</code>. Aunque si el manual no esta aun disponible - en tu lengua nativa, sería de gran ayuda si tu pudieses traducirlo.</p> -<p> - Para hacerlo, únicamente copia uno de los archivos de los manuales existentes - de <code>manual_XX.html</code>, donde <span class="emp">XX</span> identifica tu lengua. Entonces - traduce este nuevo archivo creado y envía un email al autor (ver <a href="#bugs">Informar - de bugs y comentarios</a>), para que pueda ser incluido en la nueva - edición de <code>calcurse</code>.</p> - -<h2>8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n<a name="contribute_i18n"></a></h2> -<p> - Como ya se ha mencionado, las utilidades de <code>gettext</code> son usadas - por <code>calcurse</code> para producir mensajes en diferentes lenguas. - Esta sección proporciona información acerca de como traducir estos mensajes - a tu lengua nativa. Por otra parte este 'como' es deliberadamente incompleto, - centrado específicamente en trabajar con <code>gettext</code> para <code>calcurse</code>. - Para una información mas completa deberás dirigirte al manual de <code>GNU gettext</code> en:</p> - <pre>http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/</pre> -<p> - Básicamente, hay tres tipos de personas diferentes que están involucradas en la cadena de traducción: - programadores, coordinadores de lenguaje y traductores. - Después de una rápida descripción de como funcionan las cosas, las tareas del - traductor se describen a continuación.</p> - -<h3>8.2.1 Descripción<a name="contribute_i18n_overview"></a></h3> -<p> - Para que se muestren mensajes en la lengua nativa del usuario, se requieren - dos pasos: <span class="emp">internacionalización</span> - (i18n) y <span class="emp">localización</span> (l10n).</p> -<p> - i18n se refiere a como hacer que - <code>calcurse</code> soporte múltiples lenguas. Esto es realizado por - programadores, quienes seleccionan los textos traducibles y - proporcionan una manera de que se muestren traducidos en el - arranque.</p> -<p> - l10n se - refiere a como hacer que el <code>calcurse</code> internacionalizado se adapte a la - lengua especifica del usuario, p.e. traduciendo las sentencias previamente - marcadas por los desarrolladores y seleccionando el entorno correcto - para que <code>calcurse</code> utilice el resultado de esta traducción.</p> -<p> - Entonces, las sentencias traducibles son primero marcadas por los programadores dentro - de el código fuente de los archivos en código <code>C</code>, y después recogidas en un archivo - plantilla (<span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> - la extensión <span class="emp">pot</span> significa - <span class="emp">portable object template</span>). El contenido de - esta plantilla es entonces combinado con los ficheros de traducción - para cada lengua (<span class="emp">fr.po</span> para francés por ejemplo - - donde <span class="emp">po</span> significa <span class="emp">portable object</span>, lo cual quiere decir - que puede ser leído y editado por humanos). Un equipo de traducción dado, - cogería este archivo, traduciría estas sentencias y se las mandaría de nuevo - a los desarrolladores. En el momento de la compilación, una versión binaria - de esta archivo (por razones de eficacia) producirá - (<span class="emp">fr.mo</span> - donde <span class="emp">mo</span> significa <span class="emp">machine - object</span>, lo que quiere decir que puede ser leído por programas), y entonces - instalado. Ahora <code>calcurse</code> utilizara este archivo en el arranque, - traduciendo las sentencias acorde con la configuración del locale del usuario. -</p> - -<h3>8.2.2 Tareas del traductor<a name="contribute_i18n_translator"></a></h3> -<p> - Supongamos que alguien quiere iniciar la traducción de una nueva lengua. - Estos son los pasos a seguir:</p> - <ul> - <li>Primero, localiza cual es el nombre del locale. Por ejemplo, para francés - es 'fr_FR', o simplemente 'fr'. Este es el valor que el usuario deberá poner - es su variable de entorno <code>LC_ALL</code> para que el software sea traducido - (ver <a href="#basics_invocation_variable">Variable de entorno para i18n</a>).</li> - <li>Entonces, entra en el directorio <span class="emp">po/</span> y crea un nuevo archivo-po - desde el archivo plantilla usando el siguiente comando: - <code>'msginit -i calcurse.pot -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator'</code> - Si no tienes instalado <code>msginit</code> en tu sistema, - simplemente copia el archivo <span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> a - <span class="emp">fr.po</span> y edita la cabecera a mano.</li> - </ul> -<p> - Ahora, teniendo el archivo <span class="emp">fr.po</span>, estas preparado para empezar. -</p> - -<h3>8.2.3 Archivos-po<a name="contribute_i18n_po-files"></a></h3> -<p> - El formato de los archivos-po es muy simple. De hecho, los archivos-po - están formados de cuatro cosas:</p> - <ol> - <li><span class="emp">lineas de localización:</span> te dicen donde están las sentencias - (nombre del archivo y numero de linea), en caso de que necesites un poco - mas de contexto.</li> - <li><span class="emp">lineas msgid:</span> las sentencias a traducir.</li> - <li><span class="emp">lineas msgstr:</span> las sentencias traducidas.</li> - <li><span class="emp">lineas con prefijo '#':</span> comentarios (algunos con un significado - especial, como veremos más abajo).</li> - </ol> -<p> - Básicamente, todo lo que tienes que hacer es llenar las lineas <span class="emp">msgstr</span> - con la traducción de la linea <span class="emp">msgid</span> de encima.</p> -<p> - <span class="valorise">Algunas notas:</span> - <dl> - <li><span class="emp">Sentencias Fuzzy</span></dt> - <dd>Encontraras sentencias marcadas con un comentario <code>"#, fuzzy"</code>. - <code>calcurse</code> no utilizara las traducciones de ese tipo de sentencias - hasta que tu elimines este comentario. Si una sentencia es fuzzy - significa que ya ha sido traducida pero que desde entonces ha sido - cambiada en el código fuente del programa, o que es una nueva sentencia para la cual - <code>gettext</code> ha hecho una traducción 'forzosa' basada en otras sentencias - del archivo. Esto quiere decir que tu debes revisar la traducción. - Algunas veces, la sentencia original ha cambiado solo porque se ha arreglado - una tipografía. En ese caso, tu no tienes que cambiar nada. Pero a veces, la - traducción puede no ser muy precisa y necesitara ser modificada. - Una vez que has acabado y estas satisfecho con la traducción, tan solo elimina - el comentario <code>"#, fuzzy"</code> y la traducción podrá ser usada de nuevo - en <code>calcurse</code>.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Sentencias c-format y sentencias especiales</span></dt> - <dd>Algunas sentencias tienen el siguiente comentario: <code>"#, - c-format"</code>. Esto te esta diciendo que partes de la sentencia a traducir - tienen un significado especial para el programa, puede ser que la sentencia - contenga alguna variable, como por ejemplo % , si ves algo como esto <code>"%s"</code>, - eso quiere decir que el programa remplazara esta variable por algún valor o por otra - sentencia. En ese caso, puedes traducir el resto de la sentencia pero sin modificar las - variables que pueda contener. También hay sentencias que contienen \ , como por ejemplo - <code>\n</code> o <code>\t</code>, lo primero significa un final de linea y - lo otro una tabulación, así pues, puedes traducir la sentencia pero con cuidado de no - modificar estos símbolos.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Las traducciones pueden ser excesivamente largas</span></dt> - <dd>Si las lineas son demasiado largas, pueden ser partidas de la siguiente forma: - <pre> -msgid "" -"alguna linea muy larga" -"otra linea" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Cabecera del archivo-po</span></dt> - <dd>Al principio del archivo-po, la primera sentencia forma una cabecera, - donde hay varios tipos de información. Lo mas importante es el 'charset'. Suele parecerse - a esto: - <pre> -"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" - </pre> - Debes cumplimentar también el campo 'Last-Translator' (último traductor), para que - los potenciales contribuidores puedan contactar contigo si ellos quieren colaborar - en el equipo de traducción, o hacer algún tipo de corrección sobre las traducciones. - Puedes poner solo tu nombre/nick o ańadir tu dirección de email, por ejemplo: - <pre> -"Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Comentarios</span></dt> - <dd>Ańadir comentarios (lineas que comiencen con el carácter '#') puede ser una buena manera - de evitar problemas o dificultades a los correctores u otros miembros de tu equipo.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Tamańo de las sentencias</span></dt> - <dd><code>calcurse</code> es un programa basado en curses/consola, así que puede ser muy dependiente - del tamańo del terminal donde se ejecute (numero de columnas). Piensa en ello cuando lo traduzcas. - A menudo una sentencia puede colocarse en una sola linea (la longitud standard es de 80 caracteres). - No traduzcas a lo loco, intenta ver donde se mostrara la sentencia y adapta a ello tu traducción. - </dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Algunas herramientas útiles</span></dt> - El formato de los archivos-po es muy simple, y puede ser editado con casi cualquier editor, pero - si lo prefieres, hay unas pocas herramientas especializadas que pueden resultarte - interesantes para traducir: - <ul> - <li><code>poEdit</code> (<a - href="http://www.poedit.org/" target="_blank"> - http://www.poedit.org/</a>)</li> - <li><code>KBabel</code> (<a - href="http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/" target="_blank"> - http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/</a>)</li> - <li><code>GTranslator</code> (<a - href="http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/" target="_blank"> - http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/</a>)</li> - <li><code>Emacs</code> en modo po</li> - <li><code>Vim</code> en modo po</li> - </ul> - </dd>> - <dt><span class="emp">Y finalmente</span></dt> - <dd>Espero que te hayas divertido contribuyendo a un mundo mas internacionalizado :) Si tienes alguna - pregunta no dudes en contactar conmigo en - <span class="emp">frederic @ culot . org</span>.</dd> - </dl> - -<h1>9.Enlaces<a name="links"></a></h1> -<p> - Esta sección contiene enlaces y referencias que pueden ser de tu interés. -</p> - -<h2>9.1 Pagina web de <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_homepage"></a></h2> -<p> - La pagina web de <code>calcurse</code> es: </p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse</pre> - -<h2>9.2 Lista de anuncios de <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_list"></a></h2> -<p> - Si estas interesado en el proyecto y quieres ser avisado - cuando salga una nueva versión, puedes suscribirte a la - lista de anuncios de <code>calcurse</code>. Si lo haces, recibirás - un email tan pronto como una nueva funcionalidad se ańada a - <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -<p> - Para suscribirte a la lista, envía un email a : - <span class="emp">calcurse-announce @ culot . org</span> poniendo "subscribe" - en el asunto.</p> - -<h2>9.3 <code>calcurse</code> RSS feed<a name="links_rss"></a></h2> -<p> - Otra posibilidad para enterarte de cuando aparecen nuevas versiones de Calcurse - es seguir el RSS feed en:</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml</pre> -<p> - Este RSS feed es actualizado cada vez que hay una nueva version de Calcurse disponible - describiendo las nuevas caracteristicas.</p> - -<h2><div class="todo">9.4 Other links</div><a name="links_others"></a></h2> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - You may want to look at the ical format specification (rfc2445) at: - <pre>http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445</pre> -<p> - The pcal project page can be found at: - <pre>http://pcal.sourceforge.net/</pre> -</div> - -<h1>10. Gracias a ...<a name="thanks"></a></h1> -<p> - Es la hora de dar las gracias a personas sin las que este programa - Ą no existiría ! Por eso esta es una lista de las personas que contribuyeron - y a las que me gustaría dar las gracias : - <ul> - <li>Alex por sus patches, ayuda y notas con la programación <code>C</code></li> - <li>Gwen por probarlo y las discusiones sobre como mejorar <code>calcurse</code></li> - <li>Herbert por hacer el paquete <code>calcurse</code> para FreeBSD</li> - <li>Zul por hacer el paquete <code>calcurse</code> para NetBSD</li> - <li>Wain, Steffen y Ronald por hacer el paquete <code>calcurse</code> para Archlinux</li> - <li>Kevin, Ryan, y fEnIo por hacer el paquete para <code>calcurse</code> - para Debian y Ubuntu</li> - <li>Pascal por hacer el paquete <code>calcurse</code> para Slackware</li> - <li>Alexandre por hacer el paquete <code>calcurse</code> para Mac OsX y - Darwin</li> - <li>Igor por hacer el paquete <code>calcurse</code> para ALT Linux</li> - <li>Joel por su script del calendario que inspiro la vista de calendario de <code>calcurse</code> </li> - <li>Michael Schulz y Chris M. por la traducción al alemán de <code>calcurse</code> y su manual</li> - <li>Neil Williams por la traducción al ingles</li> - <li>Tony por el patch que me ha ayudado a implementar la funcion recur_item_inday() - <span class="todo">, and for implementing the date format configuration options</span></li> - <li>José López por la traducción al Espańol de <code>calcurse</code> y su manual</li> - <li>Jeremy Roon por la traducción al holandes</li> - <li>Leandro Noferini por la traducción al italiano</li> - <li><div class="todo">Erik Saule for its patch implementing the '-N', '-s', '-S', '-r' and '-D' flags</div></li> - <li>a la gente que ha escrito softwares que me gustan y que me inspiraron, especialmente : - <ul> - <li><code>vim</code> por las teclas de desplazamiento</li> - <li><code>orpheus</code> y <code>abook</code> por la documentación</li> - <li><code>pine</code> and <code>aptitude</code> - por la interfaz de usuario</li> - <li><span class="todo"><code>tmux</code> for coding style</span></li> - </ul></li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - Y por último, muchas muchas gracias a todos los usuarios de <code>calcurse</code> - que me han enviado sus comentarios.</p> - -<div class="footer"> - Copyright © 2004-2010 Frédéric Culot<br> - Traducido al Espańol por José López - <code><testinground .at. gmail .dot. com></code><br> - Calcurse version 2.8 - Last change: March 29, 2010<br> -</div> -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/doc/manual_fr.html b/doc/manual_fr.html deleted file mode 100644 index 822f714..0000000 --- a/doc/manual_fr.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1505 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<!-- -/* - * $calcurse: manual_fr.html,v 1.29 2010/03/29 18:18:02 culot Exp $ - * - * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - * - */ ---> - -<html> -<head> -<title>documentation de CALCURSE</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> -<style type="text/css" media="all"> - @import url(manual.css); -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div id="mainContent"> - -<h1 id="title"> -<span class="main">CALCURSE - organiseur en mode texte</span></h1> - -<div class="warn"> -<h1>Résumé</h1> Ce manuel présente l'ensemble des fonctionnalités du -logiciel <code>calcurse</code> et la maničre dont on peut les -utiliser. La procédure d'installation du programme depuis ses sources -est tout d'abord décrite, ainsi que les différentes façon dont -<code>calcurse</code> peut ętre lancé. L'interface du programme est -ensuite présentée, avec l'ensemble des options qui permettent la -configuration du logiciel. Sont enfin expliquées les procédures ŕ suivre -pour faire remonter les bogues et pour contribuer au développement de -<code>calcurse</code>. -</div> - -<div id="toc"> -<h1>Table des matičres</h1> -<ul> - <li><a href="#intro">1. Introduction</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview">2. Aperçu du logiciel</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#overview_history">2.1 Origine de Calcurse</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview_features">2.2 Caractéristiques importantes</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install">3. Installation</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements">3.1 Pré-requis</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_ncurses">3.1.1 Librairie <code>ncurses</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_gettext">3.2.2 Librairie <code>gettext</code></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install_process">3.2 Processus d'installation</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics">4. Présentation générale</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation">4.1 Invocation</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">4.1.1 Arguments en ligne de commande</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_variable">4.1.2 Variable d'environnement pour l'i18n</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_environment">4.1.3 Autres variables d'environnement</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface">4.2 Interface utilisateur</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_noninteractive">4.2.1 Mode non-interactif</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_interactive">4.2.2 Mode Interactif</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_daemon"><span class="todo">4.3 Background mode</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_files">4.4 Fichiers</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_import_export">4.5 Fonctions d'import/export</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_import">4.5.1 Import</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_export">4.5.2 Export</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_help">4.6 Aide en ligne</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#options">5. Options</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#options_general">5.1 Options générales</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_keys">5.2 Raccourcis clavier</a> - <li><a href="#options_colors">5.3 Thčmes graphiques</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_layout">5.4 Disposition des panneaux</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_sidebar"><span class="todo">5.5 Sidebar configuration</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#options_notify">5.6 Réglages de la barre de notification</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#known_bugs">6. Bogues connus</a></li> - <li><a href="#bugs">7. Rapporter les bogues et commentaires</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute">8. Comment contribuer?</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_documentation">8.1 Traduction de la documentation</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n">8.2 Traduction de <code>calcurse</code></a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_overview">8.2.1 Aperçu</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_translator">8.2.2 Etapes de la traducion</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_po-files">8.2.3 Fichiers <code>po</code></a></li> - </ul></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#links">9. Liens</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#links_homepage">9.1 Site internet de <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_list">9.2 Liste de diffusion de <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_rss">9.3 Flux RSS</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_others">9.4 Autres liens</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#thanks">10. Remerciements</a></li> -</ul> -</div> - - -<h1>1. Introduction<a name="intro"></a></h1> -<p> -<code>calcurse</code> est un logiciel composé d'un calendrier et d'un organiseur -personnel en mode texte. Il permet de stocker les évčnements et rendez-vous, -ainsi qu'une liste de tâches ŕ effectuer. Un systčme de notification, -entičrement configurable par l'utilisateur, permet d'ętre prévenu lorsque -l'heure d'un rendez-vous approche. L'interface utilisateur est elle aussi -configurable, et peut s'adapter aux besoins de chacun. Enfin, un systčme d'aide -en ligne permet d'obtenir des renseignements sur toutes les commandes -disponibles. -</p> - -<h1>2. Aperçu du logiciel<a name="overview"></a></h1> -<h2>2.1 Origine de Calcurse<a name="overview_history"></a></h2> -<p> - J'ai commencé ŕ penser ŕ ce projet ŕ la fin de mon doctorat - en astrophysique... Je commençais en effet ŕ avoir de plus - en plus de mal ŕ m'organiser, et j'avais vraiment besoin d'un - bon outil pour m'aider dans cette tâche difficile ;) -</p> -<p> - D'autre part, j'apprécie beaucoup les logiciels qui font appel - ŕ des Interfaces en Mode Texte, parce que je les trouve plus - simples, plus rapides, plus portables et plus efficaces. J'ai - alors commencé ŕ programmer un calendrier rudimentaire qui - utilisait une interface de ce type. En plus de cela, je - voulais améliorer mes connaissances en <code>C</code>, langage - de programmation que je n'avais utilisé jusqu'alors que dans - le cadre de petits projets pendant mes études. J'ai donc pensé - que ce serait une bonne chose de me lancer dans ce projet, - puisque cela me permettrait ŕ la fois de mieux m'organiser, et - d'apprendre ŕ mieux programmer en <code>C</code>! -</p> -<p> - Malheureusement, j'ai obtenu mon doctorat avant de terminer - <code>calcurse</code>, mais j'ai tout de męme voulu continuer - ŕ travailler sur ce projet, en espérant que ce - programme serait utile ŕ d'autres - personnes. Voilŕ comment est né - <code>calcurse</code>... -</p> -<p> - Mais au fait, pourquoi 'calcurse' ? Et bien ce nom provient - simplement de la concaténation de 'CALendrier' et de - 'nCURSEs', qui est le nom de la librairie utilisée pour - construire l'interface utilisateur. -</p> - -<h2>2.2 Caractéristiques importantes<a name="overview_features"></a></h2> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> est multi-plateformes et est conçu pour - ętre léger, rapide et fiable. Il doit ętre utilisé dans un - terminal ou une console, soit localement ou bien sur une - machine distante par l'intermediaire d'une liaison ssh (ou - similaire). -</p> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> peut ętre lancé dans deux modes différents: - soit interactif, soit non-interactif. Le premier mode permet - de visualiser son organiseur personnel pratiquement sous - n'importe quel environnement, grâce ŕ l'interface en mode texte. - Le deuxičme mode permet de créer facilement des penses-bęte en - ajoutant <code>calcurse</code> avec les arguments appropriés dans - la table cron ou dans le script d'initialisation du shell. -</p> -<p> - De plus, <code>calcurse</code> a été créé en prenant en compte - l'utilisateur final ŕ chaque étape de sa conception, - c'est-ŕ-dire en essayant d'ętre le plus intuitif - possible. Cela implique la présence d'une aide en ligne - exhaustive, ainsi que le rappel de toutes les commandes - possibles dans la barre de status. L'interface utilisateur - est également configurable, et l'on peut choisir parmi de - nombreuses combinaisons possibles de couleurs et de positions - des fenętres. Les raccourcis clavier peuvent ętre définis aussi - par l'utilisateur, pour correspondre aux besoins de chacun. - Enfin, le systčme de notification est - entičrement configurable, l'utilisateur peut donc choisir la - maničre dont il veut ętre prévenu de l'approche d'un - rendez-vous. Les notifications peuvent également ętre envoyées - męme si l'interface utilisateur n'est pas lancée, car - <code>calcurse</code> peut tourner en tâche de fond (mode démon). -</p> - -<h1>3. Installation<a name="install"></a></h1> -<h2>3.1 Pré-requis<a name="install_requirements"></a></h2> -<h3>3.1.1 Librairie <code>ncurses</code><a name="install_requirements_ncurses"></a></h3> -<p> - L'installation de <code>Calcurse</code> ne nécessite qu'un - compilateur <code>C</code>, comme <code>cc</code> ou <code>gcc</code>, - et la librairie <code>ncurses</code>. - Il serait trčs surprenant que vous n'ayez pas déjŕ la librairie - <code>ncurses</code> d'installée sur votre machine, mais si - c'est le cas, vous pourrez la trouver ŕ l'adresse suivante : -</p> -<pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/</pre> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - It is also possible to link <code>calcurse</code> against the - <code>ncursesw</code> library (ncurses with support for unicode). - However, UTF-8 is not yet supported by <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -</div> - -<h3>3.1.2 Librairie <code>gettext</code><a name="install_requirements_gettext"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> s'aide de la librairie - <code>gettext</code> pour le support de l'internationalisation - (noté <span class="emp">i18n</span> ci-aprčs). Cela signifie que - <code>calcurse</code> peut fournir des messages multilingues - s'il est compilé avec le support NLS (<span class="emp">Native - Language Support</span> - <span class="emp">Support de Langage - Natif</span>). -</p> -<p> - Cependant, ce support est optionnel et si vous n'avez pas - besoin de la traduction des messages affichés, vous pouvez - désactiver cette option. La désactivation du support - <span class="emp">NLS</span> s'effectue en passant l'option - <code>--disable-nls</code> ŕ <code>configure</code> - (voir la section <a href="#install_process">Processus - d'Installation</a>). -</p> -<p> - Pour vérifier que les utilitaires <code>gettext</code> sont - bien installés sur votre systsčme, vous pouvez - par exemple vérifier la présence du fichier - <code>libintl.h</code> en tapant : </p> - <pre>locate libintl.h</pre> -<p> - Dans l'éventualité oů ce fichier ne serait pas trouvé, - vous pouvez obtenir les sources de <code>gettext</code> - ŕ l'adresse suivante :</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Remarque :</span> Męme si - <code>libintl.h</code> est bien localisé par la commande - précédente, il peut ętre utile de spécifier son emplacement au - moment de lancer le <a href="#install_process">processus - d'installation</a>, en passant l'option - <code>--with-libintl-prefix</code> au script - <code>configure</code>. En effet, ce script pourrait ne pas - trouver le fichier <code>libintl.h</code> si celui-ci n'est - pas installé dans un endroit usuel.</p> - - -<h2>3.2 Processus d'installation<a name="install_process"></a></h2> -<p> - Vous devez tout d'abord décompresser l'archive source de la - maničre suivante :</p> - <pre>tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz</pre> -<p> - Une fois que vous remplissez tous les pré-requis nécessaires ŕ - l'installation, le processus de compilation est simple et suit - les trois étapes usuelles : - <ol> - <li><code>./configure</code></li> - <li><code>make</code></li> - <li><code>make install</code> (peut nécessiter les privilčges - super-utilisateur)</li> - </ol> -</p> -<p> - Vous pouvez obtenir la liste des options possibles en tapant - <code>./configure --help</code>. -</p> - - -<h1>4. Présentation générale<a name="basics"></a></h1> -<h2>4.1 Invocation<a name="basics_invocation"></a></h2> -<h3>4.1.1 Arguments en ligne de commande<a name="basics_invocation_commandline"></a></h3> -<p> - Lors de son appel en ligne de commande, <code>calcurse</code> - accepte les arguments suivants (les arguments courts ou longs - sont supportés) :</p> - <p> - - <dl> - <dt><code>-a, --appointment</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche les rendez-vous pour la date du jour, puis quitte. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Remarque:</span> le calendrier ŕ utiliser peut ętre - spécifié en utilisant l'option '-c'.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-c <fichier>, --calendar <fichier></code></dt> - <dd> - Spécifie le fichier calendrier ŕ utiliser. - Le calendrier par défaut est celui contenu dans - <code>~/.calcurse/apts</code> - (voir la section <a href="#basics_files">Fichiers</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>-d <date|num>, --day <date|num></code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche les rendez-vous pour la date ou pour le nombre de - jours indiqués, suivant le format de l'argument. Deux - formats différents sont acceptés : - <ul> - <li>une date (voir ci-dessous pour les formats disponibles).</li> - <li>un nombre 'n'.</li> - </ul> - Dans le premier cas, la liste des rendez-vous pour la - date spécifiée sera affichée, alors que dans le - deuxičme cas, la liste des rendez-vous pour les 'n' - jours ŕ venir sera retournée. - Par exemple, taper <code>calcurse -d 3</code> fera - s'afficher les rendez-vous pour aujourd'hui, demain - et aprčs-demain. - <div class="todo"> - Possible formats for specifying the date are defined inside the - general configuration menu (see - <a href="#options_general">General options</a>), using the - <code>input_datefmt</code> variable. - </div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Remarque:</span> - comme pour l'option '-a', le fichier contenant le calendrier - ŕ lire peut ętre spécifié en utilisant l'option '-c'.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-D <dir>, --directory <dir></code></dt> - <dd> - Indique le répertoire dans lequel seront stockées les données. - Cette option n'est pas compatible avec l'option '-c'. Si ce - répertoire n'est pas spécifié, celui utilisé par défaut est - <code>'~/.calcurse/'</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>-h, --help</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche l'aide décrivant les options en ligne de commande, - puis quitte.</dd> - <dt><code>-i <file>, --import <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Importe les données au format icalendar contenues dans le fichier - <code>file</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>-n, --next</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche le rendez-vous suivant dans les prochaines 24 heures, puis - quitte. - Le temps indiqué représente le nombre d'heures et de - minutes restantes avant le rendez-vous. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">remarque:</span> - le fichier contenant le calendrier ŕ lire peut - ętre spécifié en utilisant l'option '-c'.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-N, --note</code></dt> - <dd> - Lorsque cette option est utilisée avec les options '-a' ou '-t', - le contenu des notes associées aux rendez-vous et aux tâches sera - également affiché. - </dd> - <dt><code>-r[num], --range[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche les rendez-vous et les événements pour le nombre num de - jours puis quitte. Si l'argument optionnel num n'est pas donné, - une plage d'une seule journée sera utilisée. - </dd> - <dt><code>-s[date], --startday[=date]</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche les rendez-vous et les événements depuis la date indiquée - puis quitte. Si l'argument optionnel date n'est pas donné, la journée - courante sera utilisée. - </dd> - <dt><code>-S<regex>, --search=<regex></code></dt> - <dd> - Lorsque cette option est utilisée avec les options '-a', '-d', '-r', - '-s' ou '-t', seuls les éléments dont la description correspond ŕ - l'expression réguličre passée en argument seront affichés. - </dd> - <dt><code>--status</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If - calcurse is running, this will tell if the interactive - mode was launched or if calcurse is running in background. - The process pid will also be indicated. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-t[num], --todo[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche la liste des 'todo', puis quitte. Si le nombre optionnel - <code>num</code> est indiqué, alors uniquement les tâches - ayant une priorité égale ŕ <code>num</code> seront - affichées. - La priorité doit ętre comprise entre 1 (priorité la plus haute) et 9 - (priorité la plus basse). Il est également possible de spécifier 0 - pour la priorité, auquel cas seules les tâches completées seront - affichées.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-v, --version</code></dt> - <dd> - Affiche la version de <code>calcurse</code>, puis quitte. - </dd> - <dt><code>-x[format], --export[=format]</code></dt> - <dd> - Exporte les données utilisateur au format spécifié. Les évčnements, - rendez-vous et tâches sont convertis et imprimés sur la sortie - standard. Deux formats d'export différents sont disponibles : - le format ical et le format pcal (voir la section - <a href="#links_others">Liens</a> ci-dessous). - Si l'argument optionnel <code>format</code> n'est pas indiqué par - l'utilisateur, alors le format ical sera utilisé par défaut. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - afin de sauvegarder les données exportées dans un fichier, - il est nécessaire de rediriger la sortie standard en utilisant une - commande comme celle-ci: - <code>$ calcurse --export > mon_fichier.dat</code></p> - </dd> - </dl> - - -<h3>4.1.2 Variable d'environnement pour l'i18n<a name="basics_invocation_variable"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> peut ętre compilé avec le support - <span class="emp">NLS</span> (voir <a - href="#install_requirements_gettext">Librairie - <code>gettext</code></a>). Ainsi, si vous voulez que les - messages affichés apparaissent dans votre langue natale, - assurez-vous tout d'abord que celle-ci est présente dans le - fichier <code>po/LINGUAS</code>. Ce fichier indique toutes - les traductions disponibles par l'intermédiaire d'un code de - deux lettres (par exemple, <span class="emp">fr</span> - représente le français). Si vous ne trouvez pas votre langue, - il serait trčs apprécié que vous apportiez votre aide pour - traduire <code>calcurse</code> (voir la partie <a - href="#contribute">Comment contribuer?</a>).</p> -<p> - Si votre langue est disponible, lancez <code>calcurse</code> - en utilisant la commande suivante : </p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR calcurse</pre> - <p>oů <span class="emp">fr_FR</span> doit ętre remplacé par la - <span class="emp">locale</span> (code de la langue suivi du - code pays) correspondant ŕ la traduction voulue.</p> -<p> - Il est également recommandé de spécifier le codage ŕ utiliser, - car dans certains cas des problčmes d'affichage des accents - peuvent survenir. Ce codage est indiqué au début du fichier po - correspondant ŕ la langue voulue. Par exemple, vous pouvez - remarquer dans le fichier fr.po que le codage utilisé est - iso-8859-1. Vous pouvez donc le préciser au lancement de - <code>calcurse</code>:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR.ISO8859-1 calcurse</pre> - -<h3>4.1.3 Autres variables d'environnement<a name="basics_invocation_environment"></a></h3> -<p> - Les variables d'environnement suivantes agissent sur le comportement de - <code>calcurse</code>:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>VISUAL</code></dt> - <dd>Indique l'éditeur externe qui sera utilisé pour rédiger des notes. - </dd> - <dt><code>EDITOR</code></dt> - <dd>Si la variable d'environnement <code>VISUAL</code> n'est pas - renseignée, l'éditeur externe qui sera utilisé par défaut est celui - contenu dans la variable <code>EDITOR</code>. Si aucune de ces deux - variables n'est renseignée, alors <code>/usr/bin/vi</code> sera - appelé par défaut. - </dd> - <dt><code>PAGER</code></dt> - <dd>Indique le visualiseur utilisé par défaut pour consulter les - notes. Si cette variable n'est pas renseignée, alors - <code>/usr/bin/less</code> sera utilisé. - </dd> - </dl> - -<h2>4.2 Interface utilisateur<a name="basics_interface"></a></h2> -<h3>4.2.1 Mode non-interactif<a name="basics_interface_noninteractive"></a></h3> -<p> - Lorsque il est appelé avec au moins un des arguments suivants: - <code>-a</code>, <code>-d</code>, <code>-h</code>, - <code>-n</code>, <code>-t</code>, <code>-v</code>, <code>-x</code>, - <code>calcurse</code> est lancé en mode non-interactif. - Cela signifie que l'information demandée sera affichée, - puis <code>calcurse</code> quittera et vous serez ramené - au prompt de l'interpréteur de commandes.</p> -<p> - De cette maničre, il est possible de rajouter une ligne telle - que <code>'calcurse --todo --appointment'</code> dans le fichier d'initialisation - de son environnement, afin de faire s'afficher ŕ chaque - début de session la liste des tâches ŕ faire et des rendez-vous - planifiés pour la journée.</p> - - -<h3>4.2.2 Mode interactif<a name="basics_interface_interactive"></a></h3> -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to - the default ones, defined when <code>calcurse</code> is launched - for the first time. If those key bindings do not suit user's needs, - it is possible to change them within the keys configuration menu - (see <a href="#options_keys">key bindings</a>).</p> -</div> -<p> - Lorsqu'il est appelé sans aucun argument ou uniquement avec - l'option <code>'-c'</code>, <code>calcurse</code> est lancé - en mode interactif. Dans ce mode s'affiche une interface qui - contient trois panneaux différents, qu'il est possible de - sélectionner cycliquement en utilisant la touche 'TAB', ainsi - que d'une barre de notification et une autre de status - (voir la figure ci-dessous).</p> - <pre> - - panneau rendez-vous---. .---panneau calendrier - | | - v v - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - | Rendez-vous || Calendrier | - |------------------------------------||----------------------------| - | (|) Avril 6, 2006 || Avril 2006 | - | ||Lun Mar Mer Jeu Ven Sam Dim | - | || 1 2 | - | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | - | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | - | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - | || | - | |+----------------------------+ - | |+----------------------------+ - | || Tâches | panneau - | ||----------------------------| tâches ŕ - | || | faire - | || | | - | || |<--. - | || | - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - |---[ Lun 22-11-2006 | 18:11:43 ]---(apts)----> 01:20 :: dîner <---|<--. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ barre de - | ? Aide R Retracer H/L -+1 Jour G Aller ŕ C Config | notification - | Q Quitter S Sauver J/K -+1 Sem. Tab Chg vue |<-. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | - | - barre de status - - </pre> -<p> - Le premier panneau représente un calendrier qui permet de - sélectionner un jour en particulier. Le second panneau contient - une liste d'évčnements et les rendez-vous du jour, et le dernier - contient une liste des tâches ŕ faire, mais qui ne sont pas - assignées ŕ une journée en particulier.</p> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display - a monthly (default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. - The weekly view would look like the following:</p> - <pre> - -+------------------------------------+ -| Calendar | -|----------------------------(# 13)--| -| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | -| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | -| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM -| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday -| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM -+------------------------------------+ - - </pre> -<p> - The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel - (<span class="emp"># 13</span> meaning it is the 13th week of the year - in the above example). The seven days of the current week are displayed - in column. Each day is divided into slices of 4 hours each (6 slices in - total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a different color if - an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. -</p> -</div> -<p> - On peut remarquer dans le panneau des rendez-vous le signe - <span class="emp">'(|)'</span> - placé juste devant la date. Ce signe représente la phase de la lune. - En fonction de la phase actuelle de celle-ci, un des signes suivants - peut-ętre indiqué : - <dl class="compact"> - <dt>'<code> |) </code>':</dt> - <dd>premier quartier</dd> - <dt>'<code> (|) </code>':</dt> - <dd>pleine lune</dd> - <dt>'<code> (| </code>':</dt> - <dd>dernier quartier</dd> - <dt>'<code> | </code>':</dt> - <dd>nouvelle lune</dd> - <dt>aucun signe:</dt> - <dd>la phase actuelle de la lune ne correspond ŕ - aucune des phases ci-dessus</dd> - </dl> - </p> - <p> - Tout en bas de l'écran on retrouve une barre de status, qui indique - les actions possibles en fonction du contexte, ainsi que la - touche qui doit ętre pressée pour effectuer cette action.</p> - <p> - Juste au-dessus de cette barre se trouve la barre de notification, qui - indique les informations suivantes, de gauche ŕ droite : la date du jour, - l'heure courante, le fichier calendrier actuellement ouvert (il s'agit - de apts dans la copie d'écran, qui est le fichier par défaut, comme indiqué - dans la section suivante), et le premier rendez-vous programmé dans les - prochaines 24 heures. Dans cet exemple, il s'agit d'un dîner qui aura lieu - dans une heure et vingt minutes.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Remarque:</span> - Certaines actions, comme éditer ou ajouter un - elément, nécessitent de renseigner du texte par - l'intermédiaire de l'éditeur de ligne de commande - fournit avec <code>calcurse</code>.</p> - <p> - Dans cet éditeur, si la ligne de commande est plus longue que la - largeur de l'écran, le caractčre '>', '*', ou '<' - sera rajouté dans la derničre colonne s'il reste du texte - aprčs, avant et aprčs, ou avant la position courante, - respectivement. La ligne défile horizontalement si - nécessaire.</p> - <p> - De plus, il existe des combinaisons de touches pour - effectuer certaines actions courantes utiles lors de l'édition - de textes. Voici ces raccourcis: - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>^a</code>:</dt> - <dd>déplacer le curseur au début de la ligne</dd> - <dt><code>^b</code>:</dt> - <dd>déplacer le curseur d'une position en arričre</dd> - <dt><code>^d</code>:</dt> - <dd>effacer le caractčre sous le curseur</dd> - <dt><code>^e</code>:</dt> - <dd>déplacer le curseur en fin de ligne</dd> - <dt><code>^f</code>:</dt> - <dd>déplacer le curseur d'une position en avant</dd> - <dt><code>^h</code>:</dt> - <dd>effacer le caractčre précédent</dd> - <dt><code>^k</code>:</dt> - <dd>effacer le texte depuis la position courante - jusqu'ŕ la fin de la ligne</dd> - <dt><code>ESC</code>:</dt> - <dd>annuler l'édition du texte courant</dd> - </dl> -</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.3 Background mode<a name="basics_daemon"></a></h2> - -<p>When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu -(see <a href="#options_notify">Notify-bar settings</a>), <code>calcurse</code> will stay -in background when the user interface is not running. In background mode, -<code>calcurse</code> checks for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined -notification command when necessary. When the user interface is started again, -the daemon automatically stops.</p> - -<p><code>calcurse</code> background activity can be logged (set the -<code>notify-daemon_log</code> variable in the notification configuration -<a href="#options_notify">menu</a>), and in that case, information about the daemon -start and stop time, reminders' command launch time, signals received... will be written -in the <code>daemon.log</code> file (see section <a href="#basics_files">files</a>).</p> - -<p> -Using the <code>--status</code> command line option (see section -<a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">Command line arguments</a>), -one can know if <code>calcurse</code> is currently running in background or not. -If the daemon is running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of -the daemon process will be shown): -<pre>calcurse is running in background (pid 14536)</pre> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> -To stop the daemon, just send the <code>TERM</code> signal to it, using a command such as: -<code>'kill daemon_pid'</code>, where <span class="emp">daemon_pid</span> is the process id -of the daemon (14536 in the above example). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.4 Fichiers<a name="basics_files"></a></h2> -<p> - La structure de fichiers suivante est créée dans le répertoire - <code>$HOME</code> de l'utilisateur (ou bien dans le répertoire - indiqué par l'option '-D') la premičre fois que - <code>calcurse</code> est lancé :</p> - <pre> -$HOME/.calcurse/ - |___notes/ - |___conf - |___keys - |___apts - |___todo - </pre> - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>notes/</code>:</dt> - <dd>ce sous-répertoire contient la description des notes - rattachées aux rendez-vous, événements ou tâches. Un fichier - texte est créé par note, et son nom est construit ŕ l'aide de - la fonction mkstemp(3). Ainsi, l'unicité de ce nom est assurée, - mais il n'a pas de relation avec l'élément auquel la note est - rattachée.</dd> - <dt><code>conf</code>:</dt> - <dd>ce fichier contient la configuration de l'utilisateur</dd> - <dt><code>keys</code>:</dt> - <dd>ce fichier contient les raccourcis clavier définis par l'utilisateur</dd> - <dt><code>apts</code>:</dt> - <dd>ce fichier contient tous les événements ainsi que les - rendez-vous de l'utilisateur</dd> - <dt><code>todo</code>:</dt> - <dd>ce fichier contient la liste des tâches ŕ effectuer</dd> - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification - configuration menu, the extra file <code>daemon.log</code> will appear - in calcurse data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity - when running in background. - </p> -</div> - -<h2>4.5 Fonctions d'import/export<a name="basics_import_export"></a></h2> -<p> - Les possibilités offertes par <code>calcurse</code> pour importer et exporter - des données sont décrites ci-dessous. -</p> - -<h3>4.5.1 Import<a name="basics_import"></a></h3> -<p> - Les données au format icalendar tel que décrit dans la spécification - rfc2445 (voir la section <a href="#links_others">liens</a> ci-dessous) - peuvent ętre importées dans calcurse. L'import ical de calcurse est basé - sur la version 2.0 de la norme rfc2445, mais pour le moment, seul un - sous-ensemble de cette spécification a été implémenté. -</p> -<p> - Les propriétés suivantes sont gérées par calcurse: - <ul> - <li>éléments <code>VTODO</code>:<br> - "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION"</li> - <li>éléments <code>VEVENT</code>:<br> - "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", - "DESCRIPTION"</li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - La propriété "DESCRIPTION" du format icalendar sera convertie dans calcurse - en ajoutant une note ŕ l'élément. Si une propriété "VALARM" est trouvée, - l'élément sera marqué comme étant important et l'utilisateur recevra une - notification (ceci ne fonctionne que pour les rendez-vous). -</p> -<p> - Voici la liste des propriétés qui ne sont pas encore implémentées: - <ul> - <li>les durées négatives ne sont pas prises en compte (l'élément n'est - pas importé)</li> - <li>certaines fréquences de répétition ne sont pas reconnues:<br> - "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / "HOURLY"</li> - <li>Certains mots-clés liés aux répétitions ne sont pas reconnus - (ceux commençant par 'BY'):<br> - "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY"<br> - "BYYEARDAY" / "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS"<br> - plus "WKST"</li> - <li>le mot-clé "EXRULE" n'est pas reconnu</li> - <li>les fuseaux horaires ne sont pas pris en compte</li> - </ul> -</p> - -<h3>4.5.2 Export<a name="basics_export"></a></h3> -<p> - Deux formats peuvent ętres utilisés pour l'export des données: - <code>ical</code> et <code>pcal</code> (voir la section - <a href="#links_others">Liens</a> ci-dessous pour avoir plus d'informations - concernant ces formats). -</p> - -<h2>4.6 Aide en ligne<a name="basics_help"></a></h2> -<p> - A n'importe quel moment, le systčme d'aide en ligne peut ętre - appelé en pressant la touche '?'. Une fois rentré dans l'aide, - les informations sur une commande spécifique peuvent ętre - obtenues en appuyant sur la touche correspondant ŕ cette - commande. - </p> - -<h1>5. Options<a name="options"></a></h1> -<p> - Tous les paramčtres de <code>calcurse</code> sont configurables - ŕ partir du menu <code>Configuration</code>, accessible en appuyant - sur 'C'. L'utilisateur se voit alors présenté un second menu - avec trois choix possibles : appuyer ŕ nouveau sur 'C' amčne - au menu de sélection des couleurs de l'interface, appuyer sur - 'L' permet de choisir parmi différents emplacements pour les - panneaux de la fenętre principale de <code>calcurse</code>, - appuyer sur 'G' vous permet de fixer les options générales, 'K' - vous permet d'accéder au menu de configuration des raccourcis clavier, - et enfin - les paramčtres de la barre de notification peuvent ętre fixés - en appuyant sur 'N'.</p> - - -<h2>5.1 Options générales<a name="options_general"></a></h2> -<p> - Ces options contrôlent le comportement général de - <code>calcurse</code>, comme décrit ci-dessous :</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>sauvegarde_automatique</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">oui</span>)</dt> - <dd>Cette option permet de sauvegarder automatiquement - les données de l'utilisateur avant de quitter, si elle est - fixée ŕ <span class="emp">oui</span>. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">attention:</span> - Aucune donnée ne sera automatiquement - sauvegardée si cette variable est fixée ŕ <code>non</code>. - Cela signifie que l'utilisateur doit appuyer sur 'S' - (pour sauvegarder) pour retrouver ses modifications au prochain - lancement de <code>calcurse</code>.</p> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">periodic_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If different from '0', user's data will be automatically - saved every <span class="emp">periodic_save</span> minutes. - When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks - (i.e. '<code>**</code>') will appear on the top right-hand side - of the screen).</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>confirmer_pour_quitter</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">oui</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si cette option est fixée ŕ <span class="emp">oui</span>, - la confirmation - de l'utilisateur est nécessaire avant de pouvoir quitter. - Autrement, appuyer sur 'Q' provoquera l'arręt de - <code>calcurse</code> sans demander confirmation. - </dd> - <dt><code>confirmer_pour_effacer</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">oui</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si cette option est fixée ŕ <span class="emp">oui</span>, appuyer sur 'D' - pour effacer un élement (soit une tâche, un rendez-vous ou bien - un évenement) provoquera l'apparition d'un message demandant - la confirmation de l'utilisateur avant d'effacer cet élement. - Si cette option est fixée ŕ <span class="emp">non</span>, aucune confirmation - ne sera demandée avant l'effacement d'un élement. - </dd> - <dt><code>masquer_messages_systčme</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">non</span>)</dt> - <dd>Fixer cette option ŕ <span>oui</span> provoque la disparition des - messages relatifs aux enregistrements ou lectures des fichiers - de données. Ceci peut ętre utile pour accélerer les processus - d'entrées/sorties. - </dd> - <dt><code>masquer_barre_progression</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">non</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si elle est fixée ŕ <span class="emp">oui</span>, cette option provoque la - disparition de la barre de progression qui est normalement chargée - d'indiquer l'état d'avancement de l'enregistrement des fichiers - de données. Si cette option est fixée ŕ <span class="emp">non</span>, - cette barre - sera affichée, en męme temps que le nom du fichier de données - actuellement en cours d'écriture - (voir la section <a href="#basics_files">Fichiers</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">calendar_default_view</span></code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to <span class="emp">0</span>, the monthly calendar view will be - displayed by default otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code>semaine_commence_lundi</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">oui</span>)</dt> - <dd>Il est possible dans <span class="emp">calcurse</span> d'indiquer quel est le - premier jour de la semaine, ŕ savoir soit le lundi, soit le dimanche. - Si l'option <code>semaine_commence_lundi</code> est fixée ŕ - <span class="emp">oui</span>, les semaines du calendrier commenceront le lundi. - Par contre si cette option est fixée ŕ <span class="emp">non</span>, - les semaines débuteront le dimanche. - </dd> - <dt><code>format_date_sortie</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">%D</span>)</dt> - <dd>Indique le format qui sera utilisé pour afficher les dates en mode - non-interactif. Par défaut, les dates sont affichées comme suit : - <span class="emp">mm/jj/aa</span>. - Les différents formats disponibles sont visibles en - tapant la commande suivante dans un terminal: <code>man 3 strftime</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>format_date_entrée</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">1</span>)</dt> - <dd>Indique le format qui sera utilisé pour entrer les dates dans - <span class="emp">calcurse</span>. Quatre choix sont possibles : - <ol> - <li>mm/jj/aaaa</li> - <li>jj/mm/aaaa</li> - <li>aaaa/mm/jj</li> - <li>aaaa-mm-jj</li> - </ol> - </dd> - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.2 Key bindings<a name="options_keys"></a></h2> -<p> - One can define it's own keybindings within the 'Keys' configuration - menu. The default keys look like the one used by the <code>vim</code> - editor, especially the displacement keys. Anyway, within this - configuration menu, users can redefine all of the keys available from - within calcurse's user interface.</p> -<p> - To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will - apply. Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new - one. You will then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new - binding. It is possible to define more than one key binding for a single - action.</p> -<p> - An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding - is not already set for another action. In that case, you will be asked - to choose a different one. Another check is done when exiting from this - menu, to make sure all possible actions have a key associated with it.</p> -<p> - The following keys can be used to define bindings: - <ul> - <li>lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as 'a', 'Z', '0'</li> - <li>CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters</li> - <li>escape, horizontal tab, and space keys</li> - <li>arrow keys (up, down, left, and right)</li> - <li>'HOME' and 'END' keys</li> - </ul> </p> -<p> - While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for - each one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the - highlighted action is used for.</p> -</div> - -<h2>5.3 Thčmes graphiques<a name="options_colors"></a></h2> -<p> - Le thčme graphique de <code>calcurse</code> peut ętre adapté aux besoins de - l'utilisateur. Pour changer les options par défaut, la page de configuration - permet de sélectionner la couleur voulue pour l'interface (premier plan et - fond). L'utilisateur doit pour cela se déplacer sur la bonne couleur en - utilisant les touches flčches ou les touches de déplacement par défaut, et - appuyer sur 'X' ou la barre d'espace pour sélectionner la couleur. Il est - également possible de conserver la couleur par défaut du terminal de - l'utilisateur en sélectionnant le choix corresondant dans la liste.</p> -<p> - Cette couleur est alors appliquée ŕ la bordure des - panneaux, aux titres, aux combinaisons de touches, et aux - informations générales affichées dans la - barre de status. Un thčme en noir et blanc est - également disponible, afin de supporter les terminaux - monochromes.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Remarque:</span> - Suivant le type de terminal que vous utilisez, et suivant - la valeur de la variable d'environnement <code>$TERM</code>, - la couleur peut ętre supportée ou non. Un message - d'erreur apparaîtra si vous essayez d'appliquer un - thčme graphique en couleur alors que votre terminal est - monochrome. Si vous savez que votre terminal supporte les couleurs - mais que <code>calcurse</code> ne veut pas les afficher, - essayez de changer la valeur de la variable d'environnement - <code>$TERM</code> (appliquez par exemple la valeur - <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span>). - </p> - -<h2>5.4 Disposition des panneaux<a name="options_layout"></a></h2> -<p> - La disposition des panneaux ŕ l'intérieur de la fenętre de - <code>calcurse</code> peut ętre paramétrée. Par défaut, le - panneau contenant le calendrier se situe en haut ŕ droite de - la fenętre, le panneau contenant la liste des tâches est situé - en bas ŕ droite, et le panneau contenant les rendez-vous se - trouve sur la partie gauche de l'écran (voir la figure dans la - section <a href="#basics_interface_interactive">Mode interactif</a> - pour un exemple de la disposition par défaut). - En choisissant une autre disposition pour les éléments composants - la fenętre de <code>calcurse</code>, l'utilisateur peut adapter - ŕ ses besoins l'interface du programme.</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The following option is used to modify the layout configuration:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>layout</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout - configuration screen for the description of the available layouts).</dd> - </dl> -</div> - - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.5 Sidebar configuration<a name="options_sidebar"></a></h2> -<p> - The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: - the calendar and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo - list or the appointment list.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>side-bar_width</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar.</dd> - </dl> -</div> - - -<h2>5.6 Réglages de la barre de notification<a name="options_notify"></a></h2> -<p> - Les options suivantes permettent de modifier les réglages de la - barre de notification:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>barre-notification_afficher</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp"oui</span>)</dt> - <dd>Cette option indique si la barre de notification doit ętre - affichée ou pas.</dd> - <dt><code>barre-notification_date</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">%a %F</span>)</dt> - <dd>Avec cette option, il vous est possible de spécifier le format qui - doit ętre utilisé pour afficher la date du jour dans la barre de - notification. Les différents formats possibles sont visibles en - tapant la commande suivante dans un terminal: <code>man 3 strftime</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>barre-notification_heure</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">%T</span>)</dt> - <dd>Avec cette option, il vous est possible de spécifier le format qui - doit ętre utilisé pour afficher l'heure courante dans la barre de - notification. Les différents formats possibles sont visibles en - tapant la commande suivante dans un terminal: <code>man 3 strftime</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>barre-notification_alerte</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">300</span>)</dt> - <dd>Si l'utilisateur a programmé un rendez-vous dans les prochaines - 'barre-notification_alerte' secondes, et qu'il a marqué celui-ci - comme étant important, l'affichage de ce rendez-vous clignotera dans - la barre de notification. - De plus, la commande définie par <code>barre-notification_commande</code> - sera executée. - De cette maničre, l'utilisateur sera alerté et saura que l'heure du rendez-vous - approche.</dd> - <dt><code>barre-notification_commande</code> - (valeur par défaut: <span class="emp">printf '\a'</span>)</dt> - <dd>Cette option indique la commande qui sera lancée lorsque l'heure d'un - rendez-vous approchera, et que ce rendez-vous a été marqué comme - 'important'. La commande spécifiée par cette option sera passée au shell - de l'utilisateur, qui l'interpretera. Pour savoir quel shell doit ętre - utilisé, <code>calcurse</code> lit le contenu de la variable - d'environnement <code>$SHELL</code>, et si cette variable est vide, la - commande sera passée ŕ <code>/bin/sh</code>. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Exemple:</span> - Supposons que le programme <code>mail</code> soit - disponible sur l'ordinateur de l'utilisateur, celui-ci peut indiquer la - commande suivante afin d'ętre prévenu par mail lorsqu'un rendez-vous - approche (la description de ce rendez-vous sera également mentionnée - dans le corps du mail):</p> - <code> -calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] nouveau rendez-vous!" user@host.com - </code> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_enable</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning <code>calcurse</code> - will run into background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the - notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More details - can be found in section <a href="#basics_daemon">'Background mode'</a>.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_log</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, <code>calcurse</code> daemon activity will be logged (see section - <a href="#basics_files">files</a></span>). - </dd> - - </dl> - -<h1>6. Bogues connus<a name="known_bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Une coloration incorrecte des objets peut résulter - d'une utilisation conjointe d'un thčme graphique en - noir et blanc et d'une variable <code>$TERM</code> - fixée ŕ <span class="emp">xterm-color</span>. Pour supprimer ce - bogue, et comme le conseille Thomas E. Dickey (le - résponsable du projet <code>xterm</code>), - <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> devrait ętre assigné - ŕ la variable <code>$TERM</code> en lieu et place de - <span class="emp">xterm-color</span> :</p> - <blockquote class="rq"> - "La valeur xterm-color pour la variable $TERM est un mauvais - choix pour les terminaux XFree86 parce qu'elle est couramment - utilisée pour les entrées terminfo qui ne - supportent pas bce. Utilisez plutôt l'entrée - xterm-xfree86 qui est distribuée avec le xterm - d'XFree86 (ou par celui, similaire, distribué avec ncurses)." - </blockquote> - - -<h1>7. Rapporter les bogues et commentaires<a name="bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Merci de renvoyer vos rapports de bogues et vos commentaires ŕ - l'adresse suivante :</p> - <pre>calcurse .ŕ. culot .point. org </pre> -<p> - ou directement ŕ l'auteur :</p> - <pre>frederic .ŕ. culot .point. org </pre> - -<h1>8. Comment contribuer?<a name="contribute"></a></h1> -<p> - Si vous désirez contribuer au projet, vous pouvez tout d'abord - envoyer vos commentaires sur ce qui vous plaît ou déplaît ou sur - ce qui vous manque dans <code>calcurse</code>. - Pour le moment, les contributions possibles concernent - la traduction des messages de <code>calcurse</code> ainsi que - de la documentation.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Remarque:</span> - toute contribution ŕ la traduction de - <code>calcurse</code> serait trčs - appréciée, mais avant tout, envoyez un mail - ŕ <code>calcurse-i18n .ŕ. culot .point. org</code> pour savoir si - quelqu'un a déjŕ commencé le processus de - traduction dans votre langue.</p> - - -<h2>8.1 Traduction de la documentation<a name="contribute_documentation"></a></h2> -<p> - Le répertoire <span class="emp">doc/</span> du paquet source contient - déjŕ des versions traduites de la documentation. - Cependant, si celle-ci n'est pas encore disponible dans votre - langue, votre aide pour sa traduction serait trčs - appréciée.</p> -<p> - Pour cela, il suffit de copier un des fichiers existant et de - renommer cette copie en <code>manual_XX.html</code>, oů - <span class="emp">XX</span> représente votre langue. Il faut ensuite - traduire ce fichier nouvellement créé et de - l'envoyer ŕ l'auteur (voir <a href="#bugs">Rapporter - les bogues et commentaires</a>), pour qu'il soit inclus dans - la prochaine version de <code>calcurse</code>.</p> - - -<h2>8.2 Traduction de <code>calcurse</code><a name="contribute_i18n"></a></h2> -<p> - Comme mentionné plus haut, les utilitaires - <code>gettext</code> sont utilisés par - <code>calcurse</code> pour produire des messages - multilingues. Cette section explique comment traduire ces - messages dans votre langue. Cependant, cette notice est - délibérément incomplčte, - puisqu'elle ne se concentre que sur l'utilisation de - <code>gettext</code> avec <code>calcurse</code>. Pour avoir - une vision plus large du Support de Langage Natif - (<code>NLS</code>), il est préférable de se - référer au manuel de <code>GNU gettext</code> - que l'on peut trouver ŕ l'adresse suivante :</p> - <pre>http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/</pre> -<p> - Pour résumer, trois catégories de personnes sont - impliquées dans la chaîne de traduction : les - programmeurs, les coordinateurs de la traduction, et les - traducteurs. Aprčs un rapide aperçu de la - maničre de procéder pour traduire le logiciel, - nous décrirons plus en détails les tâches du - traducteur.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.1 Aperçu<a name="contribute_i18n_overview"></a></h3> -<p> - Afin de pouvoir afficher du texte dans la langue natale de - l'utilisateur, deux étapes sont nécessaires : - l'<span class="emp">internationalisation</span> (i18n), et la - <span class="emp">localisation</span> (l10n).</p> -<p> - L'i18n permet ŕ <code>calcurse</code> d'ętre - multilingue. C'est un processus qui est mis en place par les - programmeurs, qui marquent les phrases ŕ traduire au - sein du code source, et qui fournissent les outils pour que - ces phrases soient traduites automatiquement pendant le - déroulement du programme.</p> -<p> - La l10n correspond quant ŕ elle au processus qui permet - ŕ <code>calcurse</code> de s'adapter ŕ la langue - de l'utilisateur. C'est-ŕ-dire qu'il traduit les - phrases précédemment marquée par les - programmeurs, et qu'il fixe correctement les variables - d'environnement afin que <code>calcurse</code> puisse utiliser - les résultats de cette traduction.</p> -<p> - Ainsi, les phrases traduisibles sont tout d'abord - marquées par les programmeurs dans le code source, puis - rassemblées dans un fichier référence - (<span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> - l'extension - <span class="emp">pot</span> signifiant - <span class="emp">portable object template</span>, objet portable de - référence). Le contenu de ce fichier est alors - associé aux fichiers contenant la traduction pour - chacune des différentes langues (fichier <span class="emp">fr.po</span> - pour le français par exemple - <span class="emp">po</span> siginifiant - <span class="emp">portable object</span>, objet portable - qui peut ętre - lu par les humains). Le traducteur devra se servir de ce - fichier, et traduira les phrases qu'il contient, puis - l'enverra aux développeurs. Ensuite, au niveau de la - compilation du programme, une version binaire de ce fichier - sera produite (pour des raisons d'efficacité), puis - installée. Cette version binaire a pour extension - <span class="emp">.mo</span>, oů <span class="emp">mo</span> - signifie <span class="emp">machine - object</span> - objet machine, c'est-ŕ-dire qui peut - ętre lu par le programme. Pour finir, - <code>calcurse</code> se servira de ce fichier <span class="emp">mo</span> - lors de son exécution pour traduire les phrases dans la langue - de l'utilisateur.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.2 Etapes de la traduction<a name="contribute_i18n_translator"></a></h3> -<p> - Supposons que quelqu'un veuille commencer une traduction dans - une nouvelle langue. Voici les étapes ŕ suivre - pour ce faire :</p> - <ul> - <li>Premičrement, trouver quel est le nom de la locale - correspondant ŕ la langue ŕ traduire. Par - exemple, pour le français, il s'agit de 'fr_FR', ou - simplement 'fr'. C'est cette valleur que l'utilisateur devra - mettre dans la variable d'environnement <code>LC_ALL</code> - pour obtenir la version traduite du logiciel (voir <a - href="#basics_invocation_variable">Variable d'environnement - pour l'i18n</a>).</li> - <li>Ensuite, il faut se rendre dans le répertoire - <span class="emp">po/</span>, et créer un nouveau fichier <span class="emp">.po</span> - ŕ partir du fichier de référence en utilisant la commande suivante : - <code>'msginit -i calcurse.pot -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator'</code> - Si vous n'avez pas <code>msginit</code> installé sur - votre systčme, vous pouvez plus simplement copier - <span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> en <span class="emp">fr.po</span> - par exemple, et éditer l'en-tęte du fichier nouvellement créé - manuellement.</li> - </ul> -<p> - Maintenant, ayant ŕ disposition ce fichier - <span class="emp">fr.po</span>, la traduction peut commencer.</p> - - -<h3>8.2.3 Fichiers <code>po</code><a name="contribute_i18n_po-files"></a></h3> -<p> - Le format des fichiers <code>po</code> est assez simple. En effet, - ils ne contiennent que quatre éléments - différents :</p> - <ol> - <li><span class="emp">ligne d'emplacement:</span> renseigne sur l'emplacement - de la phrase dans le fichier source (donne le nom du fichier - ainsi que le numéro de ligne), afin de retrouver - simplement le contexte d'oů est issu la phrase ŕ - traduire.</li> - <li><span class="emp">ligne msgid:</span> indique la phrase ŕ traduire.</li> - <li><span class="emp">ligne msgstr:</span> ligne indiquant la phrase traduite.</li> - <li><span class="emp">lignes commençant par '#'</span>: indiquent des - commentaires (certains ont une signification spéciale, - comme nous le verrons plus tard).</li> - </ol> -<p> - Pour résumer, un traducteur doit simplement remplir les - champs <span class="emp">msgstr</span> avec la traduction des lignes - trouvées juste au-dessus dans la partie <span class="emp">msgid</span>.</p> -<p> - <span class="valorise">Remarques:</span> - <dl> - <dt><span class="emp">Phrases marquées Fuzzy</span></dt> - <dd>Vous pourrez rencontrer des phrases commençant par le - commentaire <code>"#, fuzzy"</code>. - <code>calcurse</code> n'utilisera pas les traductions - commençant par ce commentaire, ŕ moins que vous - ne transformiez ces phrases. En effet, le commentaire - <code>fuzzy</code> signifie que la phrase a déjŕ - été traduite mais qu'elle a depuis - été changée dans le source du programme, - ou bien que <code>gettext</code> a effectué lui-męme - une traduction, en se basant sur une phrase similaire. Cela - implique donc que vous devez vérifier la traduction. - Parfois, la phrase originale a changé suite ŕ - une correction de faute de frappe. Dans ce cas, vous n'aurez - pas besoin de modifier la traduction. Mais dans d'autres cas, - cette traduction peut ne plus ętre valable et - nécessitera alors une mise ŕ jour. Une fois - cette mise ŕ jour effectuée, vous pouvez - supprimer - le commentaire <code>"#, fuzzy"</code>, et la traduction sera - alors ŕ nouveau prise en compte par <code>calcurse</code>. - </dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Lignes au format C et séquences spéciales</span></dt> - <dd>Certaines phrases ont le commentaire suivant: <code>"#, - c-format"</code>. Cela signifie que des parties du texte - ŕ traduire ont une signification particuličre - pour le programme, et qu'il ne faut pas les modifier. Par - exemple, les séquences contenant des <code>%</code>, comme - <code>"%s"</code>. Cela signifie que <code>calcurse</code> - remplacera ces séquences par d'autres expressions. Il - est donc important de ne pas les modifier. Il existe - également des séquences contenant des - <code>\</code>, comme <code>\n</code> ou <code>\t</code>. Il ne - faut pas les modifier non plus. En effet, la premičre - séquence représente une fin de ligne, et la - deuxičme une tabulation.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Découpage des traductions</span></dt> - <dd>Si certaines lignes sont trop longues, il est possible de - découper les phrases comme dans l'exemple ci-aprčs: - <pre> -msgid "" -"une ligne trčs longue" -"une autre ligne" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">En-tęte des fichiers po</span></dt> - <dd>Au tout début du fichier <span class="emp">po</span>, la - premičre phrase forme un en-tęte oů - différentes informations doivent ętre - renseignées. La plus importante est le jeu de - caractčres utilisé. Cette information devrait - ressembler ŕ - <pre> -"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" - </pre> - Il est également nécessaire de remplir le champ - <span class="emp">Last-Translator</span> - - <span class="emp">Dernier Traducteur</span>, afin - que d'autres traducteurs potentiels puissent se mettre en - relation avec la derničre personne ayant - retouché le fichier. De cette maničre, il est - plus simple de coordonner les efforts de traduction. Il est - possible de rajouter son adresse de courrier - électronique, par exemple: - <pre> -"Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Commentaires</span></dt> - <dd>Ajouter des commentaires (lignes commençant par '#') - peut ętre un bon moyen de signaler des problčmes ou - difficultés de traduction aux autres traducteurs.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Taille des phrases</span></dt> - <dd><code>calcurse</code> est un programme comportant une - interface console/curses, il dépend donc de la taille - du terminal utilisé (plus particuličrement du - nombre de colonnes). Il est important de garder ceci en - mémoire au moment de la traduction. Souvent, la phrase - ŕ traduire doit tenir dans une seule ligne (soit en - général 80 caractčres). Il faut en tenir - compte, et essayer de voir oů la phrase sera - placée pour adapter sa traduction.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Quelques outils utiles</span></dt> - <dd>Le format des fichiers <code>po</code> est relativement simple, et - ils peuvent ętre modifiés avec un éditeur - de texte standard. Mais il est également possible - d'utiliser des outils spécialisés pour cette - tâche: - <ul> - <li><code>poEdit</code> (<a - href="http://www.poedit.org/" target="_blank"> - http://www.poedit.org/</a>)</li> - <li><code>KBabel</code> (<a - href="http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/" target="_blank"> - http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/</a>)</li> - <li><code>GTranslator</code> (<a - href="http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/" target="_blank"> - http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/</a>)</li> - <li><code>Emacs</code> et son mode <code>po</code></li> - <li><code>Vim</code> et son mode <code>po</code></li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Finalement...</span></dt> - <dd>J'espčre que vous prendrez plaisir ŕ - contribuer ŕ l'internationalisation du monde des - logiciels libres. :) Si vous avez d'autres questions - concernant ce processus, n'hésitez pas ŕ me - contacter ŕ l'adresse - <span class="emp">frederic .ŕ. culot .point. org</span>.</dd> - </dl> - - -<h1>9. Liens<a name="links"></a></h1> -<p> - Cette section contient des liens en relation avec - <code>calcurse</code> qui peuvent vous ętre utiles.</p> - - -<h2>9.1 Site internet de <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_homepage"></a></h2> -<p> - La page web de <code>calcurse</code> est ŕ l'adresse suivante :</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse</pre> - -<h2>9.2 Liste de diffusion de <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_list"></a></h2> -<p> - Si vous ętes interessé par ce projet et que vous souhaitez - ętre prévenu lorsqu'une nouvelle version est diffusée, vous - pouvez souscrire ŕ la liste de diffusion de <code>calcurse</code>. - De cette maničre, vous recevrez un mél dčs qu'une nouvelle - version est disponible.</p> -<p> - Pour souscrire ŕ cette liste, envoyez un message ŕ l'adresse - <span class="emp">calcurse-announce .ŕ. culot .point. org</span> - avec "subscribe" dans le sujet du mél.</p> - -<h2>9.3 Flux RSS<a name="links_rss"></a></h2> -<p> - Une autre possibilité pour ętre prévenu lorsqu'une - nouvelle version de <code>calcurse</code> est disponible est de - s'abonner au flux RSS suivant :</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml</pre> -<p> - Ce flux RSS est mis ŕ jour dčs qu'une nouvelle version de - <code>calcurse</code> est diffusée, et indique quelles sont les - modifications qui ont été apportées.</p> - -<h2>9.4 Autres liens<a name="links_others"></a></h2> -<p> - La spécification du format ical (rfc2445) peut ętre trouvée ŕ l'adresse - suivante : - <pre>http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445</pre> -<p> - La page du projet pcal se trouve quant ŕ elle ŕ l'adresse suivante : - <pre>http://pcal.sourceforge.net/</pre> - -<h1>10. Remerciements<a name="thanks"></a></h1> -<p> - Je voudrais remercier ici toutes les personnes sans qui ce projet - n'aurait jamais pu voir le jour! En particulier : - <ul> - <li>Alex pour ses patches, aides et conseils sur la programmation en - <code>C</code></li> - <li>Gwen pour les tests et les discussions sur la manière d'améliorer - <code>calcurse</code></li> - <li>Herbert pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> pour - FreeBSD</li> - <li>Zul pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> pour - NetBSD</li> - <li>Kevin, Ryan, et fEnIo pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> - pour Debian et Ubuntu</li> - <li>Wain, Steffen and Ronald pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> pour - Archlinux</li> - <li>Pascal pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> pour - Slackware</li> - <li>Alexandre pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> pour - Mac OsX et Darwin</li> - <li>Igor pour la maintenance du paquet <code>calcurse</code> pour - ALT Linux</li> - <li>Joel pour son script de calendrier qui a inspiré celui de - <code>calcurse</code></li> - <li>Michael Schulz et Chris M. pour la traduction allemande de <code>calcurse</code> - et de son manuel</li> - <li>Jose Lopez pour la traduction espagnole de <code>calcurse</code> - et de son manuel</li> - <li>Neil Williams pour la traduction anglaise</li> - <li>Tony pour son patch qui a permis d'améliorer la fonction - recur_item_inday(), et pour l'implémentation des options de configuration - concernant les formats de date</li> - <li>Jeremy Roon pour la traduction en Néerlandais</li> - <li>Leandro Noferini pour la traduction en Italien</li> - <li>Erik Saule pour son patch qui a permis d'implémenter les options '-N', - '-s', '-S', '-r', et '-D' de la ligne de commande</li> - <li>les personnes qui écrivent des logiciels que j'apprécie et qui - m'ont inspiré lors de la conception de ce projet, en particulier: - <ul> - <li><code>vim</code> pour les touches de déplacement</li> - <li><code>orpheus</code> et <code>abook</code> pour la documentation</li> - <li><code>pine</code> et <code>aptitude</code> - pour l'interface en mode texte</li> - <li><span class="todo"><code>tmux</code> for coding style</span></li> - </ul></li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - Et pour terminer, un trčs grand merci ŕ tous les utilisateurs de - <code>calcurse</code> qui m'ont fait parvenir leurs commentaires.</p> - -<div class="footer"> - Copyright © 2004-2010 Frédéric Culot<br> - Calcurse version 2.8 - Derničre modification: 29 Mars 2010<br> -</div> -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/doc/manual_it.html b/doc/manual_it.html deleted file mode 100644 index 11f7f80..0000000 --- a/doc/manual_it.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1587 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<!-- -/* - * $calcurse: manual_it.html,v 1.14 2010/03/29 18:18:04 culot Exp $ - * - * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - * - */ ---> - -<html> -<head> -<title>Documentazione di <code>calcurse</code></title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> -<style type="text/css" media="all"> - @import url(manual.css); -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div id="mainContent"> - -<h1 id="title"> -<span class="main"><code>calcurse</code> - un organizer testuale</span></h1> - -<div class="warn"> -<h1>Abstract</h1> Questo manuale descrive le funzionalitĂ -di <code>calcurse</code>, e il suo utilizzo. Innanzitutto vengono -descritti la procedura di installazione a partire dai sorgenti e le -opzioni della linea di comando; successivamente viene presentata -l'interfaccia utente e tutte le opzioni di configurazione che -modificano il comportamento di <code>calcurse</code>. Infine viene -descritta la procedura per la segnalazione dei bachi e come -partecipare allo sviluppo di calcurse. -</div> - -<div id="toc"> -<h1>Table of Contents</h1> -<ul> - <li><a href="#intro">1. Introduzione</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview">2. Panoramica</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#overview_history">2.1 Storia dello sviluppo</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview_features">2.2 Principali caratteristiche</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install">3. Installazione</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements">3.1 Requisiti</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_ncurses">3.1.1 Librerie <code>ncurses</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_gettext">3.1.2 Librerie <code>gettext</code></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install_process">3.2 Procedura di installazione</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics">4. Elementi di base di <code>calcurse</code></a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation">4.1 Avvio</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">4.1.1 Argomenti della linea di comando</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_variable">4.1.2 Variabili d'ambiente per l'i18n</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_environment">4.1.3 Altre variabili d'ambiente</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface">4.2 Interfaccia utente</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_noninteractive">4.2.1 Modo non interattivo</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_interactive">4.2.2 Modo interattivo</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_daemon"><span class="todo">4.3 Background mode</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_files">4.4 Files di <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_import_export"><span class="todo">4.5 Import/Export capabilities</span></a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_import"><span class="todo">4.5.1 Import</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_export"><span class="todo">4.5.2 Export</span></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_help">4.6 Aiuto in linea</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#options">5. Opzioni</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#options_general">5.1 Opzioni generali</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_keys"><span class="todo">5.2 Key bindings</span></a> - <li><a href="#options_colors">5.3 Temi dei colori</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_layout">5.4 Configurazione dell'interfaccia</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_sidebar"><span class="todo">5.5 Sidebar configuration</span></a></li> - <li> - <a href="#options_notify">5.6 Configurazioni della barra di - notifica</a> - </li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#known_bugs">6. Bachi conosciuti</a></li> - <li><a href="#bugs">7. Riportare i bachi e feedback</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute">8. Come contribuire</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_documentation">8.1 Tradurre la documentazione</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n">8.2 i18n <code>calcurse</code></a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_overview">8.2.1 Panoramica</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_translator">8.2.2 Compiti del traduttore</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_po-files">8.2.3 File po</a></li> - </ul></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#links">9. Links</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#links_homepage">9.1 Homepage di <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_list">9.2 Lista degli annunci di <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_rss">9.3 Feed RSS di <code>calcurse</code></a></li> - <li><a href="#links_others"><div class="todo">9.4 Other links</div></a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#thanks">10. Ringraziamenti</a></li> -</ul> -</div> - -<h1>1. Introduzione<a name="intro"></a></h1> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> è un programma testuale per la gestione - dell'agenda. Permette la gestione degli eventi, degli appuntamenti - e dei compiti quotidiani: un sistema configurabile di avvisi ricorda - all'utente l'avvicinarsi delle scadenze; l'interfaccia testuale può - essere personalizzata secondo le necessitĂ dell'utente. Tutti i - comandi sono documentati da un sistema d'aiuto in linea. -</p> - -<h1>2. Panoramica<a name="overview"></a></h1> -<h2>2.1 Storia dello sviluppo<a name="overview_history"></a></h2> -<p> - Ho cominciato a pensare a questo progetto mentre stavo finendo il - mio dottorato in astrofisica... Stava diventando piuttosto difficile - organizzare la mia vita per cui avevo veramente necessitĂ di un - valido strumento per aiutarmi in questo compito difficile ;) -</p> -<p> - Personalmente apprezzo i programmi con interfaccia utente testuale - perchĂŠ sono semplici, veloci, portabili ed efficienti perciò ho - pensato di realizzare un semplice calendario testuale. - - Inoltre volevo imparare il linguaggio <code>C</code> che avevo usato - solo durante i miei studi secondari; perciò ho pensato che questo - sarebbe stato un buon progetto per organizzarmi e per imparare - qualche nozione di <code>C</code>! -</p> -<p> - Sfortunatamente ho finito il mio dottorato prima di aver - terminato <code>calcurse</code>; in ogni modo ho continuato a - lavorarci sperando che potesse risultare utile anche ad altre - persone. Perciò eccolo qua.... - -</p> -<p> - PerchĂŠ il nome 'calcurse'? PerchĂŠ è semplicemente l'unione di - 'CALendar' e 'nCURSEs', dal nome delle librerie usate per realizzare - l'interfaccia utente. -</p> - -<h2>2.2 Principali -caratteristiche<a name="overview_features"></a></h2> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> è multi-piattaforma e vuole essere leggero, - veloce e affidabile; deve essere usato all'interno della console o - in un terminale, localmente o su un computer remoto mediante una - connessione di tipo ssh. -</p> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> può essere usato in due diversi modi, - interattivo e non-interattivo. Nel primo modo permette all'utente di - controllare la propria agenda praticamente ovunque grazie - all'interfaccia testuale. - Il secondo modo permette di aggiungere appuntamenti semplicemente - usando appropriati argomenti alla linea di comando all'interno di un - compito di cron o di uno script di avvio della shell. -</p> -<p> - Inoltre <code>calcurse</code> è stato realizzato pensando all'utente - finale perciò cerca di essere quanto piĂš semplice possibile. Questo - comporta un completo aiuto in linea oltre ad una barra di stato in - cui sono elencate tutte le azioni disponibili. - Anche l'interfaccia utente è configurabile permettendo di poter - scegliere fra diverse combinazioni di colori e layout. -<span class="todo">Key bindings are also configurable, to fit everyone's needs.</span> - Infine un sistema configurabile di allarmi ricorda all'utente - l'avvicinarsi degli appuntamenti. -<span class="todo">The reminders are sent even if the user's interface -is not running, as calcurse is able to run in background.</span> -</p> - -<h1>3. Installazione<a name="install"></a></h1> -<h2>3.1 Requisiti<a name="install_requirements"></a></h2> -<h3>3.1.1 Librerie <code>ncurses</code><a name="install_requirements_ncurses"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> richiede esclusivamente un - compilatore <code>C</code> quale <code>cc</code> - oppure <code>gcc</code> nonchĂŠ le librerie <code>ncurses</code>. - È piuttosto difficile non avere le - librerie <code>ncurses</code> giĂ correttamente installate sul - proprio computer ma nel caso è possibile trovarle all'indirizzo: - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/</pre> -</p> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - It is also possible to link <code>calcurse</code> against the - <code>ncursesw</code> library (ncurses with support for unicode). - However, UTF-8 is not yet supported by <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -</div> - -<h3>3.1.2 Librerie <code>gettext</code><a name="install_requirements_gettext"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> ha il supporto per la localizzazione - (<span class="emp">i18n</span> da qui in avanti) attraverso - l'utilitĂ <code>gettext</code> perciò può usare messaggi in molte - lingue se compilato con il relativo supporto - (detto <span class="emp">NLS</span>). - -</p> -<p> - Comunque <span class="emp">NLS</span> è opzionale e se non lo si - desiderasse è possibile disabilitarlo dando - l'opzione <code>--disable-nls</code> a <code>configure</code> (vedi - la sezione <a href="#install_process">Procedura - d'installazione</a>). - - Per verificare che le utilitĂ <code>gettext</code> sono installate - sul vostro computer cercate il file di header <code>libintl.h</code> - ad esempio: -</p> - <pre>locate libintl.h</pre> -<p> - Nel caso non troviate il file potete ottenere i sorgenti - di <code>gettext</code> al seguente indirizzo: -</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Nota:</span> - - Se anche si fosse trovato il file <code>libintl.h</code> - potrebbe essere necessario specificarne la posizione durante - la <a href="#install_process">procedura d'installazione</a> - usando l'opzione <code>--with-libintl-prefix</code> - con <code>configure</code>. - - Questo perchĂŠ <code>configure</code> potrebbe non essere in - grado di localizzarlo se fosse stato installato in una - posizione inusuale. -</p> - -<h2>3.2 Procedura d'installazione<a name="install_process"></a></h2> -<p> - Innanzitutto è necessario scompattare l'archivio contenente i - sorgenti: -</p> - <pre>tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz</pre> -<p> - Una volta verificati i requisiti e scompattato l'archivio la - procedura d'installazione è piuttosto semplice visto che segue i tre - passi standard: - <ol> - <li><code>./configure</code></li> - <li><code>make</code></li> - <li><code>make install</code> (potrebbero essere necessari i - diritti di root)</li> - </ol> -</p> -<p> - Usate <code>./configure --help</code> per l'elenco delle opzioni - possibili. -</p> - -<h1>4. Elementi di base di <code>calcurse</code><a name="basics"></a></h1> -<h2>4.1 Avvio<a name="basics_invocation"></a></h2> -<h3>4.1.1 Argomenti della linea di comando<a name="basics_invocation_commandline"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> accetta le seguenti opzioni della linea di - comando (sia nel formato breve che in quello lungo): -</p> -<p> - - <dl> - <dt><code>-a, --appointment</code></dt> - <dd> - Mostra gli appuntamenti e gli eventi per il giorno corrente e - poi esce. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> il calendario - dal quale leggere gli appuntamenti può essere specificato con - l'opzione '-c'. - </p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-c <file>, --calendar <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Indica il file calendario da usare. - - Il calendario predefinito è <code>~/.calcurse/apts</code> (vedi - la sezione <a href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> - files</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>-d <data|num>, --day <data|num></code></dt> - <dd> - Mostra gli appuntamenti per la data indicata o per il numero - indicato per i giorni futuri a seconda del formato - dell'argomento. Sono possibili due formati: - - <ul> - <li>una data <span class="todo">(possible formats described below).</span></li> - <li>un numero 'n'.</li> - </ul> - Nel primo caso viene mostrata la lista degli appuntamenti per la - data indicata; nel secondo caso viene mostrata la lista per gli - 'n' giorni futuri. - Ad esempio digitando <code>calcurse -d 3</code> verrĂ mostrata - la lista degli appuntamenti di oggi, domani e dopodomani. - - <div class="todo"> - Possible formats for specifying the date are defined inside the - general configuration menu (see - <a href="#options_general">General options</a>), using the - <code>input_datefmt</code> variable. - </div> - - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> cosĂŹ come con - l'argomento '-a' il calendario dal quale leggere gli - appuntamenti può essere specificato con l'argomento '-c'.</p> - </dd> - - <dt><code>-D <dir>, --directory <dir></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Specify the data directory to use. This option is - incompatible with -c. If not specified, the - default directory is <code>'~/.calcurse/'</code>. - </div> - </dd> - - <dt><code>-h, --help</code></dt> - <dd> - Stampa la versione breve del testo che descrive le opzioni della - riga di comando ed esce.</dd> - - <dt><code>-i <file>, --import <file></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Import the icalendar data contained in <code>file</code>. - </div> - </dd> - - <dt><code>-n, --next</code></dt> - <dd> - Stampa il prossimo appuntamento nelle successive 24 ore ed esce. - Il tempo stampato indica le ore e i minuti mancanti - all'appuntamento. - - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> il calendario - dal quale leggere gli appuntamenti può essere specificato con - l'opzione '-c'.</p> - </dd> - - <dt><code>-N, --note</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a' or '-t' flag, also print note content - if one is associated with the displayed item. - </div> - </dd> - - <dt><code>-r[num], --range[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Print events and appointments for the num number of - days and exit. If no num is given, a range of 1 day - is considered. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-s[date], --startday[=date]</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Print events and appointments from date and exit. - If no date is given, the current day is considered. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-S<regex>, --search=<regex></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a', '-d', '-r', '-s', or '-t' flag, - print only the items having a description that matches the given - regular expression. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>--status</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If - calcurse is running, this will tell if the interactive - mode was launched or if calcurse is running in background. - The process pid will also be indicated. - </div> - </dd> - - <dt><code>-t[num], --todo[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Stampa la lista delle 'attivitĂ ' ed esce. Se viene specificato - anche il numero <code>num</code> opzionale vengono stampate - esclusivamente le attivitĂ che hanno prioritĂ pari al numero - stesso. - <div class="todo"> - The priority number must be between 1 (highest) and 9 (lowest). It is also possible - to specify '0' for the priority, in which case only completed tasks will be shown.</p> - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-v, --version</code></dt> - <dd> - Stampa la versione di <code>calcurse</code> ed esce. - </dd> - <dt><code>-x[format], --export[=format]</code></dt> - <dd><div class="todo"> - Export user data to specified format. Events, appointments and - todos are converted and echoed to stdout. - Two possible formats are available: ical and pcal - (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below). - If the optional argument <code>format</code> is not given, - ical format is selected by default. - </div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> è possibile - reindirizzare lo standard output per salvare i dati su un file - con un comando del tipo - <code>$ calcurse --export > my_data.dat</code></p> - </dd> - </dl> - -<h3>4.1.2 Variabili d'ambiente per l'i18n<a name="basics_invocation_variable"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> può essere compilato con il supporto per la - localizzazione - (vedi <a href="#install_requirements_gettext">librerie - <code>gettext</code></a>). - - Di conseguenza, se preferite che i messaggi del programma vengano - mostrati nella vostra lingua, innanzitutto verificate che questa sia - disponibile nel file <code>po/LINGUAS</code>: questo file indica - quali lingue sono supportate mostrando il codice di due lettere - corrispondente (ad esempio <span class="emp">fr</span> indica il - francese). Nel caso in cui la vostra lingua non fosse presente - sarebbe estremamente apprezzabile il vostro aiuto nella traduzione - di <code>calcurse</code> (vedi la sezione <a href="#contribute">Come - contribuire</a>).</p> - -<p> - Se invece la vostra lingua è presente avviate <code>calcurse</code> - con il seguente comando:</p> -<pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR calcurse</pre> -<p> - dove <span class="emp">fr_FR</span> è il nome della localizzazione - d'esempio che deve essere sostituita dal nome della localizzazione - desiderata. -</p> -<p> - È anche necessario indicare il set di caratteri da usare - perchĂŠ in alcuni casi gli accenti e altri caratteri simili non - vengono mostrati correttamente. Questo set di caratteri è indicato - all'inizio del file po corrispondente alla localizzazione prescelta: - ad esempio nel file fr.po viene indicato l'uso del set iso-8859-1 e - di conseguenza dovete avviare <code>calcurse</code> con il seguente - comando:</p> -<pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR.ISO8859-1 calcurse</pre> - -<h3>4.1.3 Altre variabili -d'ambiente<a name="basics_invocation_environment"></a></h3> -<p> - Le seguenti variabili d'ambiente modificano il funzionamento - di <code>calcurse</code>:</p> - -<dl> - <dt><code>VISUAL</code></dt> - <dd>Indica l'editor usato per scrivere le note. - </dd> - <dt><code>EDITOR</code></dt> - <dd>Se non viene impostata la variabile <code>VISUAL</code> viene - usato l'editor indicato dalla variabile <code>EDITOR</code> come - editor di default; se non viene definita nessuna variabile viene - usato l'editor <code>/usr/bin/vi</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>PAGER</code></dt> - <dd>Specifica il visualizzatore di default usato per leggere le - note. Se questa variabile non viene impostata viene - usato <code>/usr/bin/less</code>. - </dd> -</dl> - -<h2>4.2 Interfaccia utente<a name="basics_interface"></a></h2> -<h3>4.2.1 ModalitĂ non-interattiva<a name="basics_interface_noninteractive"></a></h3> -<p> - Quando <code>calcurse</code> viene avviato con una delle opzioni - <code>-a</code>, <code>-d</code>, <code>-h</code>, <code>-n</code>, <code>-t</code>, <code>-v</code>, <code>-x</code> - funziona nella modalitĂ non-interattiva; questo significa che dopo - aver mostrato le informazioni richieste <code>calcurse</code> esce riportando al - prompt della shell.</p> - -<p> - In questo modo è possibile ad esempio aggiungere una linea - siffatta <code>'calcurse --todo --appointment'</code> nel file di - avvio della shell per mostrare al logon un elenco dei compiti e - degli appuntamenti previsti per la data odierna.</p> - -<h3>4.2.2 ModalitĂ interattiva<a name="basics_interface_interactive"></a></h3> -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to - the default ones, defined when <code>calcurse</code> is launched - for the first time. If those key bindings do not suit user's needs, - it is possible to change them within the keys configuration menu - (see <a href="#options_keys">key bindings</a>).</p> -</div> -<p> - Se viene avviato senza argomenti oppure solo con - l'opzione <code>'-c'</code> <code>calcurse</code> si avvia nella modalitĂ - interattiva; in questa modalitĂ viene mostrata un'interfaccia - contenente tre differenti sezioni (fra le quali è possibile passare - con il tasto 'TAB'), una barra di notifica ed una barra di stato - (vedi la figura sotto). -</p> -<pre> - - Sezione appuntamenti ---. .--- Sezione calendario - | | - v v - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - | Appointments || Calendar | - |------------------------------------||----------------------------| - | (|) April 6, 2006 || April 2006 | - | ||Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | - | || 1 2 | - | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | - | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | - | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - | || | - | |+----------------------------+ - | |+----------------------------+ - | || ToDo | Sezione - | ||----------------------------| attivitĂ - | || | | - | || | | - | || |<--. - | || | - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - |---[ Mon 2006-11-22 | 10:11:43 ]---(apts)----> 01:20 :: lunch <---|<--. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ barra di notifica - | ? Help R Redraw H/L -/+1 Day G GoTo C Config | - | Q Quit S Save J/K -/+1 Week Tab Chg View |<-. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | - | - barra di stato - - -</pre> -<p> - La prima sezione rappresenta un calendario dove è possibile - evidenziare una particolare data; la seconda sezione contiene la - lista degli eventi e degli appuntamenti per la data evidenziata; ed - infine la terza sezione contiene la lista delle attivitĂ non - assegnate a nessun giorno particolare.</p> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display - a monthly (default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. - The weekly view would look like the following:</p> - <pre> - -+------------------------------------+ -| Calendar | -|----------------------------(# 13)--| -| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | -| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | -| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM -| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday -| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM -+------------------------------------+ - - </pre> -<p> - The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel - (<span class="emp"># 13</span> meaning it is the 13th week of the year - in the above example). The seven days of the current week are displayed - in column. Each day is divided into slices of 4 hours each (6 slices in - total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a different color if - an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. -</p> -</div> - -<p> - Nella sezione degli appuntamenti si può notare il - segno <span class="emp">'(|)'</span> accanto alla data indicante la - fase lunare secondo la seguente tabella: - - <dl class="compact"> - <dt>'<code> |) </code>':</dt> - <dd>primo quarto</dd> - <dt>'<code> (|) </code>':</dt> - <dd>plenilunio</dd> - <dt>'<code> (| </code>':</dt> - <dd>terzo quarto</dd> - <dt>'<code> | </code>':</dt> - <dd>novilunio</dd> - <dt>nessun segno:</dt> - <dd>la fase della luna non corrisponde a nessuna di queste</dd> - </dl> -</p> -<p> - Nell'ultima riga dello schermo si trova la barra di stato che - indica le azioni possibili e le relative scorciatoie di tastiera. -</p> -<p> - Al di sopra della barra di notifica si trova la barra di notifica - che indica (da destra a sinistra): la data e l'ora correnti, il file - calendario attualmente in uso (apts nella figura precedente, che è - il nome di default, vedi la prossima sezione) e il prossimo - appuntamento nelle successive 24 ore; nella figura d'esempio viene - indicato l'appuntamento per il pranzo fra un'ora e venti. -</p> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> alcune azioni, quali - modifica o aggiunta di una voce, richiedono l'inserimento del testo - mediante l'editor a linea compreso nel programma.</p> - -<p> - All'interno di questo editor se appare una linea maggiore - dell'ampiezza dello schermo vengono mostrati i caratteri '>', - '*', o '<' nell'ultima colonna nel caso ci siano altri caratteri - successivamente, prima o dopo della posizione corrente; è inoltre - possibile scorrere orizzontalmente.</p> - -<p> - Inoltre alcuni comandi sono collegati ad alcune scorciatoie. Di - seguito sono elencati alcuni comandi (dove '^' indica per il tasto - Control): - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>^a</code>:</dt> - <dd>sposta il cursore all'inizio della riga di input</dd> - <dt><code>^b</code>:</dt> - <dd>sposta il cursore indietro</dd> - <dt><code>^d</code>:</dt> - <dd>cancella il carattere davanti</dd> - <dt><code>^e</code>:</dt> - <dd>sposta il cursore alla fine della riga di input</dd> - <dt><code>^f</code>:</dt> - <dd>sposta il cursore avanti</dd> - <dt><code>^h</code>:</dt> - <dd>cancella il carattere dietro</dd> - <dt><code>^k</code>:</dt> - <dd>cancella dal cursore fino alla fine della riga di input</dd> - <dt><code>ESCAPE</code>:</dt> - <dd>cancella la modifica</dd> - </dl> -</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.3 Background mode<a name="basics_daemon"></a></h2> - -<p>When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu -(see <a href="#options_notify">Notify-bar settings</a>), <code>calcurse</code> will stay -in background when the user interface is not running. In background mode, -<code>calcurse</code> checks for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined -notification command when necessary. When the user interface is started again, -the daemon automatically stops.</p> - -<p><code>calcurse</code> background activity can be logged (set the -<code>notify-daemon_log</code> variable in the notification configuration -<a href="#options_notify">menu</a>), and in that case, information about the daemon -start and stop time, reminders' command launch time, signals received... will be written -in the <code>daemon.log</code> file (see section <a href="#basics_files">files</a>).</p> - -<p> -Using the <code>--status</code> command line option (see section -<a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">Command line arguments</a>), -one can know if <code>calcurse</code> is currently running in background or not. -If the daemon is running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of -the daemon process will be shown): -<pre>calcurse is running in background (pid 14536)</pre> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> -To stop the daemon, just send the <code>TERM</code> signal to it, using a command such as: -<code>'kill daemon_pid'</code>, where <span class="emp">daemon_pid</span> is the process id -of the daemon (14536 in the above example). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.4 File di <code>calcurse</code><a name="basics_files"></a></h2> -<p> - Al primo avvio di <code>calcurse</code> viene creata nella vostra - directory <code>$HOME</code> - <div class="todo">(or in the directory you specified with the -D option)</div> - questa gerarchia di directory: -</p> -<pre> - $HOME/.calcurse/ - |___notes/ - |___conf - |___keys - |___apts - |___todo -</pre> - -<dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>notes/</code>:</dt> - <dd>questa sotto-directory contiene le descrizioni delle note - allegate agli appuntamenti, eventi o attivitĂ . Per ogni nota viene - creato un file di testo con un nome creato dalla funziona - mkstemp(3) che dovrebbe essere unico ma senza alcuna correlazione - evidente con la descrizione dell'oggetto al quale viene collegato. - </dd> - - <dt><code>conf</code>:</dt> - <dd>questo file contiene le configurazioni dell'utente</dd> - - <dt><code>keys</code>:</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">this file contains the user-defined key bindings</span></dd> - - <dt><code>apts</code>:</dt> - <dd>questo file contiene gli eventi e gli appuntamenti - dell'utente</dd> - - <dt><code>todo</code>:</dt> - <dd>questo file contiene l'elenco delle attivitĂ </dd> -</dl> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification - configuration menu, the extra file <code>daemon.log</code> will appear - in calcurse data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity - when running in background. - </p> -</div> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.5 Import/Export capabilities<a name="basics_import_export"></a></h2> -<p> - The import and export capabilities offered by <code>calcurse</code> - are described below. -</p> - -<h3>4.5.1 Import<a name="basics_import"></a></h3> -<p> - Data in icalendar format as described in the rfc2445 specification - (see <a href="#links_others">links</a> section below) can be imported - into calcurse. Calcurse ical parser is based on version 2.0 of this - specification, but for now on, only a subset of it is supported. -</p> -<p> - The following icalendar properties are handled by calcurse: - <ul> - <li><code>VTODO</code> items:<br> - "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION"</li> - <li><code>VEVENT</code> items:<br> - "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", - "DESCRIPTION"</li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - The icalendar "DESCRIPTION" property will be converted into calcurse format - by adding a note to the item. If a "VALARM" property is found, the item - will be flagged as important and the user will get a notification (this is - only applicable to appointments). -</p> -<p> - Here are the properties that are not implemented: - <ul> - <li>negative time durations are not taken into account (item is skipped)</li> - <li>some recurence frequences are not recognize:<br> - "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / "HOURLY"</li> - <li>some recurrence keywords are not recognized - (all those starting with 'BY'):<br> - "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY"<br> - "BYYEARDAY" / "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS"<br> - plus "WKST"</li> - <li>the recurrence exception keyword "EXRULE" is not recognized</li> - <li>timezones are not taken into account</li> - </ul> -</p> - -<h3>4.5.2 Export<a name="basics_export"></a></h3> -<p> - Two possible export formats are available: <code>ical</code> and - <code>pcal</code> (see section <a href="#links_others">Links</a> below - to find out about those formats). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.6 Aiuto in linea<a name="basics_help"></a></h2> -<p> - In ogni momento è possibile richiedere il sistema dell'aiuto in - linea premendo il tasto '?': una volta avviato si possono richiedere - le informazioni su un certo comando premendo il tasto relativo. -</p> - -<h1>5. Opzioni<a name="options"></a></h1> -<p> - Tutti i parametri di <code>calcurse</code> sono configurabili dal menĂš - Configuration accessibile premendo il tasto 'C' che porta ad un - sotto-menĂš con quattro possibili scelte: premendo ancora 'C' si - raggiunge alla configurazione dello schema dei colori; premendo 'L' - è possibile scegliere la configurazione dell'interfaccia dello - schermo principale di <code>calcurse</code> (praticamente le posizioni relative - dei tre pannelli); premendo 'G' è possibile modificare alcune - opzioni generali; - <span class="todo">pressing 'K' opens the key bindings configuration - menu,</span> - ed infine premendo 'N' è possibile modificare le - impostazioni della barra di notifica. -</p> - -<h2>5.1 Opzioni generali<a name="options_general"></a></h2> -<p> - Queste opzioni controllano il comportamento generale di <code>calcurse</code>: -</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>auto_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Questa opzione permette di salvare automaticamente i dati - dell'utente all'uscita del programma. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">attenzione:</span> i - dati non verranno salvati automaticamente se impostato - a <span class="emp">no</span>. Questo comporta che sarĂ - necessario premere 'S' per salvare i dati eventualmente - modificati. - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">periodic_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If different from '0', user's data will be automatically - saved every <span class="emp">periodic_save</span> minutes. - When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks - (i.e. '<code>**</code>') will appear on the top right-hand side - of the screen).</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>confirm_quit</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Se impostato a <span class="emp">yes</span> è necessario - confermare l'uscita dal programma; altrimenti premendo 'Q' - <code>calcurse</code> esce senza chiedere conferma. - </dd> - - <dt><code>confirm_delete</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>) - </dt> - <dd> - Se viene impostata a <span class="emp">yes</span> premendo - 'D' per cancellare una voce (che può essere - un'<span class="emp">attivitĂ </span>, - un <span class="emp">appuntamento</span>, o - un <span class="emp">evento</span>) è necessario - confermare. Altrimenti non è necessaria alcuna conferma. - </dd> - - <dt><code>skip_system_dialogs</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>) - </dt> - <dd> - Impostando questa opzione a <span class="emp">yes</span> - non verranno piĂš mostrati i messaggi di sistema - riguardanti il salvataggio e la lettura dei dati, utile - per velocizzare le operazioni di input e output. - </dd> - <dt><code>skip_progress_bar</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Se impostato a <span class="emp">yes</span> non verrĂ - visualizzata la barra di avanzamento che indica il - salvataggio in corso dei files insieme al file che viene - salvato (vedi la - sezione <a href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> files</a>). - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">calendar_default_view</span></code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to <span class="emp">0</span>, the monthly calendar view will be - displayed by default otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed.</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>week_begins_on_monday</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Con questa opzione è possibile indicare con quale giorno, - domenica o lunedĂŹ, far iniziare la settimana nella - finestra del calendario. - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">output_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%D</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">This option indicates the format to be used when displaying dates - in non-interactive mode. Using the default values, dates are displayed the - following way: <span class="emp">mm/dd/aa</span>. - You can see all of the possible formats by typing <code>man 3 strftime</code> - inside a terminal.</span></dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">input_datefmt</code> - (default: <span class="emp">1</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">This option indicates the format that will be used to enter dates in - <span class="emp">calcurse</span>. Four choices are available:</span> - <ol> - <li>mm/dd/yyyy</li> - <li>dd/mm/yyyy</li> - <li>yyyy/mm/dd</li> - <li>yyyy-mm-dd</li> - </ol> - </dd> - - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.2 Key bindings<a name="options_keys"></a></h2> -<p> - One can define it's own keybindings within the 'Keys' configuration - menu. The default keys look like the one used by the <code>vim</code> - editor, especially the displacement keys. Anyway, within this - configuration menu, users can redefine all of the keys available from - within calcurse's user interface.</p> -<p> - To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will - apply. Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new - one. You will then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new - binding. It is possible to define more than one key binding for a single - action.</p> -<p> - An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding - is not already set for another action. In that case, you will be asked - to choose a different one. Another check is done when exiting from this - menu, to make sure all possible actions have a key associated with it.</p> -<p> - The following keys can be used to define bindings: - <ul> - <li>lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as 'a', 'Z', '0'</li> - <li>CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters</li> - <li>escape, horizontal tab, and space keys</li> - <li>arrow keys (up, down, left, and right)</li> - <li>'HOME' and 'END' keys</li> - </ul> </p> -<p> - While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for - each one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the - highlighted action is used for.</p> -</div> - - <h2>5.3 Color themes<a name="options_colors"></a></h2> -<p> - Il tema del colore di <code>calcurse</code> può essere personalizzato a seconda - delle necessitĂ dell'utente. Nella pagina di configurazione è - possibile cambiare i colori dello sfondo e del primo piano del tema - predefinito: usando i tasti cursore o i tasti di movimento definiti - per lo spostamento in <code>calcurse</code>, il tasto 'X' o lo spazio per - selezionare il colore l'utente può vedere l'anteprima del tema - prescelto. È anche possibile mantenere i colori predefiniti del - terminale selezionando la relativa opzione nella lista. -</p> - -<p> - Il tema scelto viene applicato ai bordi del pannello, ai titoli, - alle indicazioni delle scorciatoie da tastiera e in generale alle - informazioni mostrate nella barra di stato. Fra gli altri è anche - presente un tema in bianco e nero per usarlo sui terminali monocromatici. -</p> - - <p class="rq"> - <span class="valorise">Nota:</span> i colori possono anche - non essere supportati a seconda del tipo di terminale e dal - valore della variabile d'ambiente <code>$TERM</code>; nel - caso in cui il tipo di terminale non li supportasse apparirĂ - un messaggio d'errore provando a cambiare i colori. - Se sapete che il vostro terminale supporta i colori ma - questi non appaiono provate ad impostare la variabile - <code>$TERM</code> ad un altro valore (come ad - esempio <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span>). - </p> - - -<h2>5.4 Configurazione del layout<a name="options_layout"></a></h2> -<p> - Il layout è la posizione dei pannelli all'interno dello schermo di - <code>calcurse</code>. Il layout predefinito è cosĂŹ disposto: il pannello del - calendario in alto a destra, il pannello delle attivitĂ in basso a - destra e il pannello degli appuntamenti sul lato sinistro dello - schermo (vedi la figura della - sezione <a href="#basics_interface_interactive">Modo - interattivo</a>). - Scegliendo un altro layout è possibile personalizzare l'aspetto di - <code>calcurse</code> a seconda delle necessitĂ . -</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The following option is used to modify the layout configuration:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>layout</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout - configuration screen for the description of the available layouts).</dd> - </dl> -</div> - - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.5 Sidebar configuration<a name="options_sidebar"></a></h2> -<p> - The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: - the calendar and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo - list or the appointment list.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>side-bar_width</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar.</dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<h2>5.6 Impostazioni della barra delle notifiche<a name="options_notify"></a></h2> -<p> - Le seguenti opzioni modificano il comportamento della barra delle - notifiche: -</p> -<dl> - <dt><code>notify-bar_show</code> - (default: <span class="emp">yes</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Questa opzione imposta la visibilitĂ della barra delle notifiche. - </dd> - - <dt><code>notify-bar_date</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%a %F</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Questa opzione imposta il formato utilizzato per la data mostrata - all'interno della barra delle notifiche. È possibile vedere - tutti i possibili formati digitando <code>man 3 strftime</code> - all'interno di un terminale. - </dd> - - <dt><code>notify-bar_time</code> - (default: <span class="emp">%T</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Questa opzione imposta il formato utilizzato per mostrare l'orario - all'interno della barra delle notifiche. È possibile vedere - tutti i possibili formati digitando <code>man 3 strftime</code> - all'interno di un terminale. - </dd> - - <dt><code>notify-bar_warning</code> - (default: <span class="emp">300</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Nel caso sia presente un appuntamento marcato come 'important' - nell'intervallo definito (in secondi) nella variabile - 'notify-bar_warning' viene mostrata lampeggiante la descrizione - dell'appuntamento stesso all'interno della barra delle notifiche. - Inoltre viene eseguito il comando definito - dall'opzione <code>notify-bar_command</code>. - In questo modo è possibile essere avvisati dell'avvicinarsi - di un appuntamento. - </dd> - - <dt><code>notify-bar_command</code> - (default: <span class="emp">printf '\a'</span>)</dt> - <dd> - Questa opzione imposta il comando che deve essere avviato - all'avvicinarsi di un appuntamento marcato come 'important'. Il - comando viene passato alla shell che lo deve interpretare. Per - sapere quale tipo di shell è in uso verificare il valore della - variabile d'ambiente <code>$SHELL</code>; nel caso questa - variabile non sia impostata viene usata <code>/bin/sh</code>. - - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Esempio:</span> - Ammesso che sul sistema in uso sia disponibile il - comando <code>mail</code> il seguente comando permette di - ricevere la notifica con un messaggio di posta elettronica di un - appuntamento imminente (la descrizione dell'appuntamento viene - inclusa anche nel corpo del messaggio): - </p> - <code> - calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] upcoming appointment!" user@host.com - </code> - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_enable</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning <code>calcurse</code> - will run into background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the - notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More details - can be found in section <a href="#basics_daemon">'Background mode'</a>.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_log</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, <code>calcurse</code> daemon activity will be logged (see section - <a href="#basics_files">files</a></span>). - </dd> - -</dl> - -<h1>6. Bachi conosciuti<a name="known_bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - L'evidenziazione delle voci appare scorretta usando calcurse con un - tema bianco e nero insieme alla variabile <code>$TERM</code> - impostata a <span class="emp">xterm-color</span>. - - Per risolvere questo baco, cosĂŹ come affermato da Thomas E. Dickey - (manutentore di <code>xterm</code>), si deve usare il - valore <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> per la - variabile <code>$TERM</code>: -</p> -<blockquote class="rq"> - "The xterm-color value for $TERM is a bad choice for XFree86 xterm - because it is commonly used for a terminfo entry which happens to - not support bce. Use the xterm-xfree86 entry which is distributed - with XFree86 xterm (or the similar one distributed with ncurses)." -</blockquote> - -<h1>7. Segnalazione dei bachi e feedback<a name="bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Siete invitati a segnalare i bachi e quant'altro a: -</p> -<pre>calcurse .at. culot .dot. org</pre> -<p> - oppure direttamente all'autore: -</p> -<pre>frederic .at. culot .dot. org</pre> - -<h1>8. Come contribuire<a name="contribute"></a></h1> -<p> - Se siete interessati a collaborare al progetto dovreste prima di - tutto segnalare pregi e difetti oppure funzionalitĂ mancanti in - <code>calcurse</code>. - Attualmente è possibile partecipare alle traduzioni dei messaggi e - del manuale di <code>calcurse</code> -</p> -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Nota:</span> ogni aiuto ad - aumentare il supporto all'internazionalizzazione di <code>calcurse</code> è - benvenuto ma prima di cominciare scrivete a - <code>calcurse-i18n .at. culot .dot. org</code> - per evitare di duplicare gli sforzi. -</p> - -<h2>8.1 Tradurre la documentazione<a name="contribute_documentation"></a></h2> -<p> - La directory <span class="emp">doc/</span> del pacchetto dei - sorgenti contiene anche le versioni giĂ tradotte del manuale di - <code>calcurse</code>; se il manuale non è ancora stato tradotto nella vostra - lingua ogni aiuto in tal senso sarĂ piĂš che apprezzato. -</p> -<p> - Per fare questo è sufficiente copiare il file contenente il manuale - con il nome <code>manual_XX.html</code> - dove <span class="emp">XX</span> identifica il vostro linguaggio: - questo file deve essere tradotto ed inviato all'autore - (vedi <a href="#bugs">Riportare i bachi e feedback</a>) cosĂŹ che - possa essere incluso nel successivo rilascio - di <code>calcurse</code>. -</p> - -<h2>8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n<a name="contribute_i18n"></a></h2> -<p> - - Le utilitĂ di <code>calcurse</code> producono messaggi multi-lingua, - cosĂŹ come ricordato in precedenza: questa sezione contiene - informazioni sulla traduzione di questi messaggi nella vostra - lingua; queste informazioni sono però incomplete in quanto sono - concentrate sull'uso di <code>gettext</code> - per <code>calcurse</code>. Per informazioni maggiormente - approfondite e per comprendere il Grande Disegno che sottintende al - Supporto delle Lingue fate riferimento al manuale di - <code>GNU gettext</code>: - -</p> -<pre>http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/</pre> -<p> - Fondamentalmente sono tre le figure coinvolte nel processo di - traduzione: gli sviluppatori, i coordinatori per la lingua e i - traduttori. Dopo una rapida scorsa al funzionamento del meccanismo - verrĂ illustrato il compito dei traduttori. -</p> - - -<h3>8.2.1 Panoramica<a name="contribute_i18n_overview"></a></h3> -<p> - Per essere in grado di mostrare i messaggi nel linguaggio definito - dall'utente sono necessari due passaggi: - l'<span class="emp">internazionalizzazione</span> (i18n) e - la <span class="emp">localizzazione</span> (l10n). -</p> -<p> - i18n è la possibilitĂ per <code>calcurse</code> di supportare svariati linguaggi - che viene inserita dagli sviluppatori, i quali indicano come - traducibili i messaggi e prevedono un sistema per mostrarli tradotti - mentre il programma sta funzionando. -</p> -<p> - l10n è invece il rendere <code>calcurse</code> cosĂŹ programmato adatto al - linguaggio definito dall'utente traducendo le stringhe predefinite - dagli sviluppatori e impostando le variabili d'ambiente cosĂŹ che - <code>calcurse</code> sia in grado di mostrare le stringhe tradotte. -</p> -<p> - Le stringhe traducibili vengono innanzitutto indicate come tali nei - sorgenti <code>C</code>, poi raccolte in un file modello - (<span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> - la cui - estensione <span class="emp">pot</span> - significa <span class="emp">portable object template</span>). Il - contenuto del file modello viene successivamente inserito nei file - per la traduzione per ogni linguaggio (ad - esempio <span class="emp">fr.po</span> per il francese, la cui - estensione <span class="emp">po</span> sta - per <span class="emp">portable object</span>, cioè leggibile e - modificabile dagli umani). - Ogni gruppo di traduzione prende questo file, ne traduce le stringhe - e poi le invia indietro agli sviluppatori. - Al momento della compilazione viene prodotta una versione binaria di - questo file per ragioni d'efficienza (nel nostro - esempio <span class="emp">fr.mo</span> - - dove <span class="emp">mo</span> sta per <span class="emp">machine - object</span>, cioè leggibile dai programmi) e successivamente - installato. - A questo punto <code>calcurse</code> sarĂ in grado di usare questo file - traducendo le stringhe a seconda delle variabili d'ambiente - impostate dall'utente. -</p> - - -<h3>8.2.2 Compiti dei traduttori<a name="contribute_i18n_translator"></a></h3> -<p> - Questi sono i passaggi da seguire qualora si volesse iniziare una - nuova traduzione: -</p> -<ul> - <li> - Innanzitutto si deve trovare quale sia la sigla che individua il - linguaggio prescelto: ad esempio 'fr_FR' o piĂš semplicemente 'fr' - indica il francese. Questo sarĂ il valore a cui impostare la e - variabile d'ambiente <code>LC_ALL</code> perchĂŠ il programma - mostri correttamente le stringhe tradotte (vedi - <a href="#basics_invocation_variable">Variabili d'ambiente per - l'i18</a>). - </li> - - <li> - Poi si dovrĂ creare un nuovo file 'po' all'interno della - directory <span class="emp">po/</span> usando un file modello con - il seguente comando: - <code>'msginit -i calcurse.pot -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator'</code>. - Nel caso in cui il comando <code>msginit</code> non sia - disponibile sul sistema in uso copiate semplicemente il - file <span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> con il nome (nel nostro - esempio) <span class="emp">fr.po</span> e modificatene gli header - a mano. - </li> -</ul> -<p> - A questo punto è possibile iniziare la traduzione del - file <span class="emp">fr.po</span> appena creato. -</p> - - -<h3>8.2.3 I file po<a name="contribute_i18n_po-files"></a></h3> -<p> - Il formato dei file po è relativamente semplice essendo composti di - quattro componenti: -</p> -<ol> - <li> - <span class="emp">Linee locations:</span> indicano la posizione in - cui si trovano le stringhe (nome del file e numero di linea) nel - caso sia necessario avere un po' di contesto. - </li> - <li> - <span class="emp">Linee msgid:</span> le stringhe da tradurre. - </li> - <li> - <span class="emp">Linee msgstr:</span> le stringhe tradotte. - </li> - <li> - <span class="emp">Linee che iniziano con '#':</span> commenti (alcuni - con significati speciali come spiegato piĂš avanti). - </li> -</ol> -<p> - Praticamente è necessario tradurre le suddette linee marcate - con <span class="emp">msgstr</span> con la traduzione delle linee - marcate con <span class="emp">msgid</span> -</p> -<p> - <span class="valorise">Alcune note:</span> - <dl> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Stringhe fuzzy</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Potrete trovare alcune stringhe marcate con un - commento <code>"#, fuzzy"</code>, stringhe che <code>calcurse</code> non - userĂ finchĂŠ non verrĂ preso qualche provvedimento. Questo - perchĂŠ la stringa in questione è stata cambiata nei sorgenti del - programma oppure perchĂŠ <code>gettext</code> ha tentato di - 'indovinarne' il significato basandosi su altre stringhe simili - giĂ presenti nel file. Questo comporta la necessitĂ di - controllare la traduzione. - Alcune volte la stringa originale è stata modificata per - correggere un errore ortografico; in questo caso non è - necessaria alcuna azione. Altre volte però la traduzione non è - piĂš corretta per cui è necessario rivederla. - Una volta che la traduzione può essere considerata corretta è - sufficiente rimuovere la linea <code>"#, fuzzy"</code> e questa - verrĂ usata normalmente. - </dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Stringhe c-format e sequenze speciali</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Alcune stringhe potranno avere il commento <code>"#, c-format"</code>. - Questo indica che una componente della stringa ha un particolare - significato per il programma e che quindi avrĂ lasciata - inalterata. Ad esempio la sequenze come <code>"%s"</code> - vengono sostituite dal programma con altre stringhe. - Ci sono anche le sequenze del tipo <code>\n</code> - e <code>\t</code> che non devono essere modificate perchĂŠ la - prima indica un ritorno a capo e la seconda una tabulazione. - </dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Le traduzioni possono avere ritorno a - capo</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Se le linee sono troppo lunghe possono essere interrotte cosĂŹ: - <pre> - msgid "" - "some very long line" - "another line" - </pre> - </dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Header dei file po</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Nelle prime righe del file po la prima stringa costituisce un - header contenente alcune informazioni che devono essere - completate. Questi header sono: - <pre> - "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" - </pre> - È anche necessario compilare il campo 'Last-Translator' - di modo che altri potenziali collaboratori possano contattarvi - per unire gli sforzi o per segnalare errori e - correzioni. È possibile usare anche un soprannome o - aggiungere un indirizzo di posta elettronica come ad esempio: - <pre> - "Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" - </pre></dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Commenti</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Aggiungere commenti (indicati dalle linee che iniziano con il - carattere '#') può essere un valido modo per indicare problemi o - difficoltĂ trovate nella traduzione ad altri collaboratori o in - generale ai partecipanti alla traduzione. - </dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Dimensione delle stringhe</span> - </dt> - <dd> - <code>Calcurse</code> è un programma per la console scritto - usando le librerie 'curses' per cui può essere fortemente - limitato dalle dimensioni (in particolare dal numero di colonne) - del terminale, limitazioni che è necessario tenere a mente - mentre si traduce. Spesso una stringa deve essere tutta compresa - in una singola linea (la cui dimensione standard è di 80 - caratteri). Ponete attenzione e verificate che la vostra - traduzione si adatti alla posizione prevista sullo schermo. - </dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">Alcuni utili strumenti</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Il file po ha una struttura estremamente semplice per cui può - essere modificato anche direttamente con un normale editor di - testi; in ogni caso è possibile anche usare degli strumenti - specializzati: - <ul> - <li> - <code>poEdit</code> (<a href="http://www.poedit.org/" target="_blank">http://www.poedit.org/</a>) - </li> - <li> - <code>KBabel</code> - (<a href="http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/" target="_blank">http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/</a>) - </li> - <li> - <code>GTranslator</code> - (<a href="http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/" target="_blank">http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/</a>) - </li> - <li> - <code>Emacs</code> po mode - </li> - <li> - <code>Vim</code> po mode - </li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt> - <span class="emp">E per chiudere</span> - </dt> - <dd> - Mi auguro che troviate soddisfazione nel contribuire ad un mondo - maggiormente internazionalizzato. :) Se avete altre domande non - esitate a contattarmi all'indirizzo - <span class="emp">frederic .at. culot .dot. org</span>. - </dd> - </dl> - - - <h1>9. Link<a name="links"></a></h1> -<p> - Questa sezione contiene link e riferimenti che possono risultare - interessanti. -</p> - -<h2>9.1 Homepage di <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_homepage"></a></h2> -<p> - L'homepage di <code>calcurse</code> è -</p> -<pre>http://culot.org/calcurse</pre> - -<h2>9.2 Mailing list degli annunci di <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_list"></a></h2> -<p> - Se siete interessati al progetto e volete ricevere gli annunci - relativi ai rilasci delle nuove versioni (o all'inserimento di nuove - funzionalitĂ ) potete iscrivervi alla mailing list degli annunci di - <code>calcurse</code>. -</p> -<p> - Per iscriversi alla lista inviate un messaggio - all'indirizzo <span class="emp">calcurse-announce .at. culot - .dot. org</span> con "subscribe" nel soggetto. -</p> - -<h2>9.3 Feed rss di <code>calcurse</code><a name="links_rss"></a></h2> -<p> - Un'altra possibilitĂ per ricevere questi annunci è l'iscrizione al - feed RSS all'indirizzo: -</p> -<pre>http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml</pre> -<p> - Questo feed viene aggiornato ogni volta viene pubblicata una nuova - versione con la descrizione delle funzionalitĂ aggiunte. -</p> - -<h2><div class="todo">9.4 Other links</div><a name="links_others"></a></h2> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - You may want to look at the ical format specification (rfc2445) at: - <pre>http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445</pre> -<p> - The pcal project page can be found at: - <pre>http://pcal.sourceforge.net/</pre> -</div> - -<h1>10. Ringraziamenti<a name="thanks"></a></h1> -<p> - È giunto il momento per ringraziare le persone senza le quali - questo programma non esisterebbe. Questa è la lista: - <ul> - <li> - Alex per le sue patch, per il suo aiuto e consigli per la - programmazione in <code>C</code> - </li> - <li> - Gwen per il testing e per i consigli in generale sulle migliorie - da apportare a <code>calcurse</code> - </li> - <li> - Herbert per aver impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> per FreeBSD - </li> - <li> - Zul per aver impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> per NetBSD - </li> - <li> - Wain, Steffen e Ronald per aver - impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> per Archlinux - </li> - <li> - Kevin, Ryan, e fEnIo per aver - impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> per Debian e Ubuntu - </li> - <li> - Pascal per aver impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> per - Slackware - </li> - <li> - Alexandre e Markus per aver impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> - per Mac OsX e Darwin - </li> - <li> - Igor per aver impacchettato <code>calcurse</code> per ALT Linux - </li> - <li> - Joel per il suo script calendar che ha inspirato la vista a - calendario per <code>calcurse</code> - </li> - <li> - Michael Schulz e Chris M. per la traduzione in tedesco - di <code>calcurse</code> e del manuale - </li> - <li> - Jose Lopez per la traduzione in spagnolo - di <code>calcurse</code> e del manuale - </li> - <li> - Neil Williams per la traduzione inglese - </li> - <li> - Tony per la sua patch che ha contribuito a migliorare la - funzione recur_item_inday() - <span class="todo">, and for implementing the date format configuration options</span> - </li> - <li> - Jeremy Roon per la traduzione olandese - </li> - <li> - Leandro Noferini per la traduzione italiana - </li> - <li><div class="todo">Erik Saule for its patch implementing the '-N', '-s', '-S', '-r' and '-D' flags</div></li> - <li> - le persone che hanno scritto software che mi piace e che - mi ha inspirato, e specialmente: - <ul> - <li> - <code>vim</code> per i tasti di movimento - </li> - <li> - <code>orpheus</code> e <code>abook</code> per la - documentazione - </li> - <li> - <code>pine</code> e <code>aptitude</code> per l'interfaccia - utente testuale - </li> - <li><span class="todo"><code>tmux</code> for coding style</span></li> - </ul> - </li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - Ed infine ancora molti ringraziamenti a tutti gli utenti - di <code>calcurse</code> che mi hanno inviato i loro commenti. -</p> - -<div class="footer"> - Copyright © 2004-2010 Frédéric Culot<br> - Calcurse version 2.8 - Last change: March 29, 2010<br> -</div> -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/doc/manual_nl.html b/doc/manual_nl.html deleted file mode 100644 index 87e8fa1..0000000 --- a/doc/manual_nl.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1350 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//NL"> -<!-- -/* - * $calcurse: manual_nl.html,v 1.21 2010/03/29 18:18:04 culot Exp $ - * - * Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org> - * All rights reserved. - * - * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without - * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions - * are met: - * - * - Redistributions of source code must retain the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer. - * - * - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - * following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - * materials provided with the distribution. - * - * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS - * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT - * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, - * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT - * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY - * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT - * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE - * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - * - */ ---> - -<html> -<head> -<title>CALCURSE documentatie</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> -<style type="text/css" media="all"> - @import url(manual.css); -</style> -</head> -<body> - -<div id="mainContent"> - -<h1 id="title"> -<span class="main">CALCURSE - tekst-gebaseerde organizer</span></h1> - -<div class="warn"> -<h1>Abstract</h1> Deze handleiding beschrijft de functionaliteit van calcurse -en hoe die te gebruiken. Als eerste wordt de installatie vanaf de broncode -beschreven, samen met de commandoregel-argumenten. Daarna, wordt de interface -met alle instellingen die de werking van <code>calcurse</code> wijzigen, -besproken. Als laatste wordt zowel de procedure van het melden van fouten in -<code>calcurse</code> uitgelegd, alsook de manier waarop men kan meehelpen om -<code>calcurse</code> te verbeteren. -</div> - -<div id="toc"> -<h1>Inhoudsopgave</h1> -<ul> - <li><a href="#intro">1. Introductie</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview">2. Overzicht</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#overview_history">2.1 Inleiding</a></li> - <li><a href="#overview_features">2.2 Belangrijke kenmerken</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install">3. Installatie</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements">3.1 Afhankelijkheden</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_ncurses">3.1.1 <code>ncurses</code> bibliotheek</a></li> - <li><a href="#install_requirements_gettext">3.1.2 <code>gettext</code> bibliotheek</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#install_process">3.2 Installatieprocedure</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics">4. <code>calcurse</code> basis</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation">4.1 Calcurse starten</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">4.1.1 Commandoregel-opties</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_variable">4.1.2 Omgevingsvariabele voor i18n</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_invocation_environment">4.1.3 Andere omgevingsvariabelen</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface">4.2 Gebruikers-interface</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_noninteractive">4.2.1 Niet-interactieve modus</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_interface_interactive">4.2.2 Interactieve modus</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_daemon"><span class="todo">4.3 Background mode</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_files">4.4 <code>calcurse</code> bestanden</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_import_export">4.5 Import/Export mogelijkheden</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#basics_import">4.5.1 Importeren</a></li> - <li><a href="#basics_export">4.5.2 Exporteren</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#basics_help">4.6 Online hulp</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#options">5. Opties</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#options_general">5.1 Algemene opties</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_keys"><span class="todo">5.2 Key bindings</span></a> - <li><a href="#options_colors">5.3 Kleurenschema's</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_layout">5.4 Layout configuratie</a></li> - <li><a href="#options_sidebar"><span class="todo">5.5 Sidebar configuration</span></a></li> - <li><a href="#options_notify">5.6 Informatiebalk instellingen</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#known_bugs">6. Bekende bugs</a></li> - <li><a href="#bugs">7. Rapporteren bugs en aanmerkingen</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute">8. Hoe kan ik mee helpen?</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_documentation">8.1 Vertalen van documentatie</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n">8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_overview">8.2.1 Overzicht</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_translator">8.2.2 Vertaal stappen</a></li> - <li><a href="#contribute_i18n_po-files">8.2.3 Po-bestanden</a></li> - </ul></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#links">9. Links</a> - <ul> - <li><a href="#links_homepage">9.1 <code>Calcurse</code> homepage</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_list">9.2 <code>Calcurse</code> nieuws lijst</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_rss">9.3 <code>Calcurse</code> RSS feed</a></li> - <li><a href="#links_others">9.4 Links</a></li> - </ul></li> - <li><a href="#thanks">10. Dankwoord</a></li> -</ul> -</div> - -<h1>1. Introductie<a name="intro"></a></h1> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> is een tekstgebaseerde kalender en planner. Het - helpt om overzicht te houden over afspraken en alledaagse taken. Een - aan te passen meldingssysteem herinnert de gebruiker aan komende - deadlines, en de curses-gebaseerde interface kan aangepast worden aan - de wensen van de gebruiker. Alle commando's zijn gedocumenteerd in een - online hulpsysteem. -</p> - -<h1>2. Overzicht<a name="overview"></a></h1> -<h2>2.1 Inleiding<a name="overview_history"></a></h2> -<p> - Ik begon te denken aan dit project toen ik bijna afgestudeerd was in - de astrofysica... Het werd moeilijk om alles georganiseerd te houden - en ik had behoefte aan een goed hulpmiddel om me daar bij te helpen. - ;) -</p> -<p> - Ik hou van programma's die gebruik maken van de tekst-interface, omdat - ze simpel, snel, overdraagbaar en efficient zijn, dus ik dacht eraan - om een simpele tekst-interface kalender te programmeren. Ook wilde ik - graag verder leren programmeren in de programmeertaal <code>C</code>, - welke ik alleen in mijn vooropleiding had gebruikt. Zodoende zou ik - dus leren programmeren in <code>C</code>, en mijn zaakjes voor elkaar - krijgen. -</p> -<p> - Helaas studeerde ik af voordat ik klaar was met <code>calcurse</code>, - maar ik was nog steeds geboeid door het project, in de hoop dat het - ook voor anderen een handig programma zou zijn. En hier is dan het - resultaat... -</p> -<p> - Waarom de naam 'calcurse', vraagt u zich af? Het is simpelweg een - samentrekking van 'CALendar' en 'nCURSEs', de naam van de bibliotheek - die gebruikt wordt om de gebruikers-interface aan te sturen. -</p> - -<h2>2.2 Belangrijke kenmerken<a name="overview_features"></a></h2> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> is multi-platform, neemt weinig systeembronnen - in beslag, en is snel en betrouwbaar. Het moet gebruikt worden binnen - een console of terminal, lokaal of op een aparte computer door middel - van een connectie met een programma zoals ssh. -</p> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> kan op twee verschillende manieren gebruikt - worden: interactieve of niet-interactieve modus. De eerste modus zorgt - er voor dat men zijn eigen agenda bijna overal kan bekijken, dankzij - de tekst-gebaseerde interface. Met de tweede modus, kan men makkelijk - met geheugensteuntjes werken door <code>calcurse</code> met de juiste - commandoregel-opties in een cron tab of shell init script te - zetten. -</p> -<p> - Bovendien, is <code>calcurse</code> geschreven met de - eindgebruiker in gedachten, en is dus zo gebruikersvriendelijk - mogelijk. Dit betekent dat er een volledige hulp-functie is, en de - beschikbare acties altijd op het scherm staan in de statusbalk. De - gebruikers-interface is ook aan te passen, en men kan tussen - verschillende kleurenschema's en layout-combinaties kiezen. -<span class="todo">Key bindings are also configurable, to fit everyone's needs.</span> - En als laatste, is er het configurabele meldingssysteem, dat gebruikers - verwittigt van op handen zijnde afspraken. -<span class="todo">The reminders are sent even if the user's interface -is not running, as calcurse is able to run in background.</span> -</p> - -<h1>3. Installatie<a name="install"></a></h1> -<h2>3.1 Benodigheden<a name="install_requirements"></a></h2> -<h3>3.1.1 <code>ncurses</code> bibliotheek<a name="install_requirements_ncurses"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>Calcurse</code> maakt alleen gebruik van een <code>C</code> - compiler, zoals <code>cc</code> of <code>gcc</code>, en de - <code>ncurses</code> bibliotheek. Het is onwaarschijnlijk dat er nog - geen juiste versie van <code>ncurses</code> op uw computer staat, maar - indien het niet zo is, is het via de volgende url te vinden:</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ncurses/</pre> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Note:</span> - It is also possible to link <code>calcurse</code> against the - <code>ncursesw</code> library (ncurses with support for unicode). - However, UTF-8 is not yet supported by <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -</div> - -<h3>3.1.2 <code>gettext</code> bibliotheek<a name="install_requirements_gettext"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> ondersteunt internationalisatie - (<span class="emp">i18n</span> - genoemd hierna) door middel van <code>gettext</code>. Dit betekent - dat <code>calcurse</code> berichten in verschillende talen kan - weergeven, indien gecompileerd met native language support - (<span class="emp">NLS</span>). -</p> -<p> - <span class="emp">NLS</span> is optioneel en als het niet nodig is, - kan het uitgeschakeld worden. Dit wordt gedaan door - <code>--disable-nls</code> als optie mee te geven aan - <code>configure</code> (zie sectie <a - href="#install_process">Installatieprocedure</a>). Om te zien of - gettext op het systeem aanwezig is, kan er gezocht worden naar het - <code>libintl.h</code> header bestand b.v.:</p> - <pre>locate libintl.h</pre> -<p> - Indien het header bestand niet gevonden wordt, kan het via de volgende - url verkregen worden:</p> - <pre>http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gettext/</pre> -<p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorize">Noot:</span> - Zelfs als <code>libintl.h</code> gevonden wordt, is het - misschien beter om de lokatie van het bestand tijdens de <a - href="#install_process">Installatieprocedure</a>) mee te geven aan - <code>configure</code> door middel van - <code>--with-libintl-prefix</code>. Het zou kunnen, dat - <code>configure</code> de bibliotheek niet kan vinden, als het op een - niet-gangbare plaats geïnstalleerd is. -</p> - -<h2>3.2 Installatieprocedure<a name="install_process"></a></h2> -<p> - Als eerste moet het volgende archief uitgepakt worden met gunzip en - untar:</p> - <pre>tar zxvf calcurse-2.8.tar.gz</pre> -<p> - Zodra de benodigde pakketten geïnstalleerd zijn en het archief - uitgepakt is, is de installatieprocedure vrij simpel, via de - standaard drie stappen: - <ol> - <li><code>./configure</code></li> - <li><code>make</code></li> - <li><code>make install</code> (mogelijk root privileges nodig)</li> - </ol> -</p> -<p> - Typ <code>./configure --help</code> om een lijst te zien van mogelijke - opties. -</p> - -<h1>4. <code>calcurse</code> basis<a name="basics"></a></h1> -<h2>4.1 Het aanroepen van calcurse<a name="basics_invocation"></a></h2> -<h3>4.1.1 Commandoregel-opties<a name="basics_invocation_commandline"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> accepteert de volgende opties op de - commandoregel (zowel korte en lange opties worden ondersteund):</p> - <p> - - <dl> - <dt><code>-a, --appointment</code></dt> - <dd> - Geeft de afspraken van vandaag weer en verlaat het programma. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - de te gebruiken kalender waaruit de afspraken gelezen - moeten worden, kan gekozen worden met de '-c' vlag.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-c <file>, --calendar <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Kies het te gebruiken kalenderbestand. De standaardkalender is - <code>~/.calcurse/apts</code> (zie sectie <a - href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> bestanden</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code>-d <date|num>, --day <date|num></code></dt> - <dd> - Geef de afspraken weer van de gegeven datum of van het gegeven aantal - komende dagen, afhankelijk van de opties. Er zijn twee mogelijkheden: - <ul> - <li>een datum <span class="todo">(possible formats described below).</span></li> - <li>een nummer 'n'.</li> - </ul> - In het eerste geval, wordt een lijst met afspraken voor de gegeven - datum weergegeven, terwijl in het tweede geval, een lijst met - afspraken voor de komende 'n' aantal dagen wordt weergegeven. - Als je bijvoorbeeld <code>calcurse -d 3</code> intypt, zullen de - afpraken voor vandaag, morgen en overmorgen worden weergegeven. - <div class="todo"> - Possible formats for specifying the date are defined inside the - general configuration menu (see - <a href="#options_general">General options</a>), using the - <code>input_datefmt</code> variable. - </div> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - Net zoals bij de '-a' vlag, kan de te gebruiken kalender - worden gekozen met de '-c' vlag.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-D <dir>, --directory <dir></code></dt> - <dd> - Specificeer de te gebruiken directory. Deze optie kan niet samen - met -c gebruikt worden. Als geen directory is gegeven, wordt - standaard <code>'~/.calcurse/'</code> gebruikt. - </dd> - <dt><code>-h, --help</code></dt> - <dd> - Geeft een korte hulptekst weer, met de ondersteunde - commandoregel-opties en verlaat het programma. - </dd> - <dt><code>-i <file>, --import <file></code></dt> - <dd> - Importeer de icalender-data uit <code>file</code>. - </dd> - <dt><code>-n, --next</code></dt> - <dd> - Geeft de eerstvolgende afspraak weer die binnen 24 uur valt en verlaat - het programma. - De weergegeven tijd is het aantal uren en minuten tot de afspraak. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - de te gebruiken kalender met de afspraken, kan gekozen - worden met de '-c' vlag.</p> - </dd> - <dt><code>-N, --note</code></dt> - <dd> - Indien gebruikt met de '-a' of 't' vlag, wordt ook de inhoud van de - gerelateerde noot weergegeven. - </dd> - <dt><code>-r[num], --range[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Geeft de gebeurtenissen en afspraken voor num aantal dagen weer. - Als num niet is gegeven wordt een dag gebruikt. - </dd> - <dt><code>-s[date], --startday[=date]</code></dt> - <dd> - Print gebeurtenissen en afspraken voor datum en stopt. Als er geen - datum wordt gegeven, wordt de huidige datum gebruikt. - </dd> - <dt><code>-S<regex>, --search=<regex></code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - When used with the '-a', '-d', '-r', '-s', or '-t' flag, - print only the items having a description that matches the given - regular expression. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>--status</code></dt> - <dd> - <div class="todo"> - Display the status of running instances of calcurse. If - calcurse is running, this will tell if the interactive - mode was launched or if calcurse is running in background. - The process pid will also be indicated. - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-t[num], --todo[=num]</code></dt> - <dd> - Geef de 'todo' lijst weer en verlaat het programma. Als het optionele - nummer <code>num</code> wordt meegegeven, zullen alleen de todo's met - de prioriteit gelijk aan <code>num</code> worden weergegeven. - <div class="todo"> - The priority number must be between 1 (highest) and 9 (lowest). It is also possible - to specify '0' for the priority, in which case only completed tasks will be shown.</p> - </div> - </dd> - <dt><code>-v, --version</code></dt> - <dd> - Geeft het versienummer van <code>calcurse</code> weer en verlaat het - programma. - </dd> - <dt><code>-x[format], --export[=format]</code></dt> - Exporteer data van de gebruiker naar een bepaald formaat. - Gebeurtenissen, afspraken en taken worden geconverteerd en naar - stdout gezonden. Er is een keuze uit twee formaten: ical en pcal - (zie sectie <a href="#links_others">Links</a> beneden). Als het - optionele argument <code>formaat</code> niet is gegeven, zal het - ical formaat worden gebruikt. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - Om de data te exporteren naar een bestand, kan men de - standaard output omleiden met een commando zoals: - <code>$ calcurse --export > my_data.dat</code></p> - </dd> - </dl> - -<h3>4.1.2 Omgevingsvariabele voor i18n<a name="basics_invocation_variable"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> kan gecompileerd worden met native language - support (zie <a - href="#install_requirements_gettext"><code>gettext</code> - bibliotheek</a>). Als je berichten wilt zien in je moedertaal, kijk - dan eerst na of het beschikbaar is door naar het - <code>po/LINGUAS</code> bestand te kijken. Dit bestand geeft de - beschikbare talen weer door middel van twee letters. (Voorbeeld, - <span class="emp">fr</span> duidt frans aan). Indien je je taal niet vindt, zouden we - het op prijs stellen, als je meehelpt met het vertalen van - <code>calcurse</code> (zie <a href="#contribute">Hoe kan ik - helpen?</a>).</p> -<p> - Als je taal beschikbaar is, start <code>calcurse</code> met het - volgende commando:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR calcurse</pre> -<p> - waar <span class="emp">fr_FR</span> de locale naam van dit voorbeeld is, maar - veranderd moet worden naar de locale van de gewenste taal.</p> -<p> - De te gebruiken karakterset zou ook gespecificeerd moeten worden, - omdat anders in bepaalde gevallen de accenten en dergelijke niet - correct weergegeven worden. De karakterset wordt gekozen in het begin - van het po bestand, dat overeenkomt met de gewenste taal. Je kan - bijvoorbeeld in het fr.po bestand zien dat het gebruik maakt van de - iso-8859-1 karakterset, dus om <code>calcurse</code> te starten, kan - het volgende commando worden gebruikt:</p> - <pre>LC_ALL=fr_FR.ISO8859-1 calcurse</pre> - -<h3>4.1.3 Andere omgevingsvariabelen<a name="basics_invocation_environment"></a></h3> -<p> - De volgende omgevingsvariabelen bepalen hoe <code>calcurse</code> werkt:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>VISUAL</code></dt> - <dd>Specificeert welke externe editor wordt gebruikt voor het - schrijven van een noot. - </dd> - <dt><code>EDITOR</code></dt> - <dd>als de <code>VISUAL</code> omgevingsvariabele niet is ingesteld, - zal de inhoud van <code>EDITOR</code> worden gebruikt voor het - bepalen van de externe editor. Als beide variabelen niet zijn - ingesteld zal <code>/usr/bin/vi</code> worden gebruikt. - </dd> - <dt><code>PAGER</code></dt> - <dd>Specificeert met welk programma een noot wordt weergegeven. - Als de variabele leeg is, zal <code>/usr/bin/less</code> gebruikt - worden. - </dd> - </dl> - -<h2>4.2 Gebruikers-interface<a name="basics_interface"></a></h2> -<h3>4.2.1 Niet-interactieve modus<a name="basics_interface_noninteractive"></a></h3> -<p> - <code>calcurse</code> wordt in niet-interactieve modus gestart, als - ten minste een van de volgende opties wordt gebruikt: - <code>-a</code>, <code>-d</code>, <code>-h</code>, <code>-n</code>, - <code>-t</code>, <code>-v</code>, <code>-x</code>, - Dit betekent dat de gewenste informatie wordt getoond, en dat daarna - <code>calcurse</code> simpelweg wordt verlaten en men weer terug is - bij de shell prompt.</p> -<p> - Op deze manier, kan men een regel zoals <code>'calcurse --todo - --appointment'</code> in zijn init config bestand zetten, zodat - bij het inloggen de takenlijst en afspraken van vandaag worden - weergegeven.</p> - -<h3>4.2.2 Interactieve modus<a name="basics_interface_interactive"></a></h3> -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - Key bindings that are indicated in this manual correspond to - the default ones, defined when <code>calcurse</code> is launched - for the first time. If those key bindings do not suit user's needs, - it is possible to change them within the keys configuration menu - (see <a href="#options_keys">key bindings</a>).</p> -</div> -<p> - Als <code>calcurse</code> zonder opties of alleen met de - <code>-c</code> optie wordt aangeroepen, wordt <code>calcurse</code> - in interactieve modus gestart. In deze modus, wordt er een interface - getoond, dat drie verschillende panels (panelen) bevat, waartussen je - kan schakelen door middel van de 'TAB' toets, een notify-bar - (informatiebalk), en een statusbar (statusbalk) (zie onderstaand - figuur).</p> - <pre> - - afspraken panel---. .---kalender panel - | | - v v - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - | Afspraken || Kalender | - |------------------------------------||----------------------------| - | (|) April 6, 2006 || April 2006 | - | || Ma Di Wo Do Vr Za Zo | - | || 1 2 | - | || 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | - | || 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | - | || 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - | || 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - | || | - | |+----------------------------+ - | |+----------------------------+ - | || Taken | taken - | ||----------------------------| panel - | || | | - | || | | - | || |<--. - | || | - +------------------------------------++----------------------------+ - |---[ Ma 2006-11-22 | 10:11:43 ]---(apts)----> 01:20 :: lunch <---|<--. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ informatie - | ? Help R Herteken H/L -/+1 Dag G Ga Naar C Config | balk - | Q Einde S Opslaan J/K -/+1 Week Tab Schakelen |<-. - +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | - | - statusbalk - - </pre> -<p> - Het eerste panel geeft een kalender weer, die het mogelijk maakt om - een bepaalde datum te kiezen. Het tweede panel bevat de afspraken en - gebeurtenissen van die dag. Het laatste panel bevat een lijst met - taken (todo's) die nog moeten gebeuren, maar niet aan een bepaalde dag - zijn toegewezen.</p> -<div class="todo"> -<p> - Depending on the selected view, the calendar could either display - a monthly (default as shown in previous figure) or weekly view. - The weekly view would look like the following:</p> - <pre> - -+------------------------------------+ -| Calendar | -|----------------------------(# 13)--| -| Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun | -| 29 30 31 01 02 03 04 | -| <----+-- slice 1: 00:00 to 04:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 2: 04:00 to 08:00 AM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 3: 08:00 to 12:00 AM -| - -- -- -- -- -- -- - <-+-- midday -| <----+-- slice 4: 12:00 to 04:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 5: 04:00 to 08:00 PM -| -- -- -- -- -- -- | -| <----+-- slice 6: 08:00 to 12:00 PM -+------------------------------------+ - - </pre> -<p> - The current week number is displayed on the top-right side of the panel - (<span class="emp"># 13</span> meaning it is the 13th week of the year - in the above example). The seven days of the current week are displayed - in column. Each day is divided into slices of 4 hours each (6 slices in - total, see figure above). A slice will appear in a different color if - an appointment falls into the corresponding time-slot. -</p> -</div> - -<p> - In het afspraken panel, staat vlak voor de datum het <span class="emp">'(|)'</span> - teken. Dit geeft de huidige fase van de maan aan. Afhankelijk van de - fase, kunnen de volgende tekens worden gezien: - <dl class="compact"> - <dt>'<code> |) </code>':</dt> - <dd>eerste kwartier</dd> - <dt>'<code> (|) </code>':</dt> - <dd>volle maan</dd> - <dt>'<code> (| </code>':</dt> - <dd>laatste kwartier</dd> - <dt>'<code> | </code>':</dt> - <dd>nieuwe maan</dd> - <dt>geen teken:</dt> - <dd>huidige fase van de maan correspondeert met geen - van bovenstaande fases</dd> - </dl> - </p> - <p> - Aan de onderkant van het scherm is de statusbalk, die de mogelijke - acties en de daarbij horende toetscombinaties weergeeft.</p> - <p> - Net boven de statusbalk is de informatiebalk, die van links naar - rechts het volgende toont: de huidige datum, de huidige tijd, het - kalenderbestand dat in gebruik is (apts in het bovenstaand voorbeeld, - dat het standaardkalender bestand is, zie de volgende sectie), en de - volgende afspraak binnen 24 uur. In het voorbeeld staat dat het over - een uur en twintig minuten tijd is voor de lunch.</p> - <p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - Voor sommige acties, zoals het bewerken of toevoegen van - een item, is het nodig dat er tekst wordt ingevoerd. Dit wordt gedaan - met de hulp van de ingebouwde editor.</p> - <p> - Als een regel met tekst langer is dan de breedte van het scherm, wordt - er in de editor een '>', '*', or '<' karakter getoond in de - laatste kolom, wat aanduid dat er respectievelijk meer karakters - achter, voor en achter, of voor de huidige positie staan. De - tekstregel schuift horizontaal mee als het nodig is.</p> - <p> - Sommige bewerkingscommando's zijn gebonden aan speciale controle - karakters. Hierna zijn de beschikbare bewerkingscommando's weergegeven - ('^' staat voor de control-toets): - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>^a</code>:</dt> - <dd>verplaats de cursor naar het begin van de invoerregel</dd> - <dt><code>^b</code>:</dt> - <dd>verplaats de cursor terug</dd> - <dt><code>^d</code>:</dt> - <dd>verwijder een karakter voorwaarts</dd> - <dt><code>^e</code>:</dt> - <dd>verplaats de cursor naar het einde van de invoerregel</dd> - <dt><code>^f</code>:</dt> - <dd>verplaats de cursor voorwaarts</dd> - <dt><code>^h</code>:</dt> - <dd>verwijder een karakter terug</dd> - <dt><code>^k</code>:</dt> - <dd>verwijder de invoer vanaf de cursor naar het einde van - de regel</dd> - <dt><code>ESCAPE</code>:</dt> - <dd>annuleert het bewerken</dd> - </dl> -</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>4.3 Background mode<a name="basics_daemon"></a></h2> - -<p>When the daemon mode is enabled in the notification configuration menu -(see <a href="#options_notify">Notify-bar settings</a>), <code>calcurse</code> will stay -in background when the user interface is not running. In background mode, -<code>calcurse</code> checks for upcoming appointments and runs the user-defined -notification command when necessary. When the user interface is started again, -the daemon automatically stops.</p> - -<p><code>calcurse</code> background activity can be logged (set the -<code>notify-daemon_log</code> variable in the notification configuration -<a href="#options_notify">menu</a>), and in that case, information about the daemon -start and stop time, reminders' command launch time, signals received... will be written -in the <code>daemon.log</code> file (see section <a href="#basics_files">files</a>).</p> - -<p> -Using the <code>--status</code> command line option (see section -<a href="#basics_invocation_commandline">Command line arguments</a>), -one can know if <code>calcurse</code> is currently running in background or not. -If the daemon is running, a message like the following one will be displayed (the pid of -the daemon process will be shown): -<pre>calcurse is running in background (pid 14536)</pre> - -<p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> -To stop the daemon, just send the <code>TERM</code> signal to it, using a command such as: -<code>'kill daemon_pid'</code>, where <span class="emp">daemon_pid</span> is the process id -of the daemon (14536 in the above example). -</p> -</div> - -<h2>4.4 <code>calcurse</code> bestanden<a name="basics_files"></a></h2> -<p> - De volgende structuur wordt in je <code>$HOME</code> directory - aangemaakt, of in de door -D aangeduide directory) - als <code>calcurse</code> voor de eerste keer wordt gestart:</p> - <pre> -$HOME/.calcurse/ - |___notes/ - |___conf - |___keys - |___apts - |___todo - </pre> - <dl class="compact"> - <dt><code>notes/</code>:</dt> - <dd>deze subdirectory bevat de beschrijvingen van de noten die - zijn bijgesloten bij afspraken, gebeurtenissen of taken. Voor - elke noot wordt er een tekstbestand aangemaakt. Dit bestand - heeft een unieke naam dat bepaald wordt door mkstemp(3). Deze - naam heeft echter geen enkel verband met de beschrijving van - het corresponderende item.</dd> - <dt><code>conf</code>:</dt> - <dd>bevat de configuratie van de gebruiker.</dd> - <dt><code>keys</code>:</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">this file contains the user-defined key bindings</span></dd> - <dt><code>apts</code>:</dt - <dd>bevat alle gebeurtenissen en afspraken van de gebruiker.</dd> - <dt><code>todo</code>:</dt> - <dd>bevat de takenlijst.</dd> - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Note:</span> - If the logging of calcurse daemon activity was set in the notification - configuration menu, the extra file <code>daemon.log</code> will appear - in calcurse data directory. This file contains logs about calcurse activity - when running in background. - </p> -</div> - -<h2>4.5 Import/Export mogelijkheden<a name="basics_import_export"></a></h2> -<p> - De import en export mogelijkheden van <code>calcurse</code> zijn als - volgt: -</p> - -<h3>4.5.1 Import<a name="basics_import"></a></h3> -<p> - Data in icalender formaat, zoals beschrevein in de rfc2445 specificatie - (zie <a href="#links_others">links</a> sectie beneden), kan - geïmporteerd worden in calcurse. De Calcurse ical parser is op - versie 2.0 van deze specificatie gebaseerd. Van nu af aan echter, zal - alleen een subset worden ondersteund. -</p> -<p> - Hier volgt het icalendar formaat zoals calcurse het gebruikt: - <ul> - <li><code>VTODO</code> items:<br> - "PRIORITY", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", "DESCRIPTION"</li> - <li><code>VEVENT</code> items:<br> - "DTSTART", "DTEND", "DURATION", "RRULE", "EXDATE", "VALARM", "SUMMARY", - "DESCRIPTION"</li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - Het icalender "DESCRIPTION"-veld (omschrijving) zal worden geconverteerd naar - het eigen formaat van calcurse, door het toevoegen van een noot. Als - een "VALARM"-veld is gevonden, zal het worden gemarkeerd als belangrijk - en zal de gebruiker een melding krijgen (alleen bij afspraken). -</p> -<p> - Hier zijn de velden die niet worden gebruikt: - <ul> - <li>negatief tijdsduur zal niet herkend worden (item wordt - overgeslagen) - </li> <li>sommige herhalings frequenties worden niet - herkend:<br> - "SECONDLY" / "MINUTELY" / "HOURLY"</li> - <li>Sommige herhalingssleutelwoorden worden niet herkend (degene - die starten met 'BY'):<br> - "BYSECOND" / "BYMINUTE" / "BYHOUR" / "BYDAY" / "BYMONTHDAY"<br> - "BYYEARDAY" / "BYWEEKNO" / "BYMONTH" / "BYSETPOS"<br> - plus "WKST"</li> - <li>het exceptie herhalingssleutelwoord "EXRULE" wordt niet - herkend</li> - <li>er wordt geen rekening gehouden met timezones</li> - </ul> -</p> - -<h3>4.5.2 Export<a name="basics_export"></a></h3> -<p> - Twee export formaten zijn voorradig: <code>ical</code> en - <code>pcal</code> (zie sectie <a href="#links_others">Links</a> beneden - voor meer informatie over deze formaten). -</p> - -<h2>4.6 Online hulp<a name="basics_help"></a></h2> -<p> - De ingebouwde hulp kan waar nodig aangeroepen worden door middel van - de '?' toets. Tijdens het gebruik van de hulpschermen kan een - specifiek commando opgevraagd worden door op de toetscombinatie te - drukken van dat commando. -</p> - -<h1>5. Opties<a name="options"></a></h1> -<p> - Alle opties van <code>calcurse</code> zijn aan te passen vanuit het - Configuratie menu. Als je op 'C' drukt, kom je in een submenu met 5 - keuzes: Druk opnieuw 'C' om naar de configuratie van de - kleurenschema's te gaan, druk op 'L' om naar de hoofdindeling van - <code>calcurse</code> te gaan (in andere woorden, waar de 3 panels op - het scherm komen), druk op 'G' om een aantal algemene opties in te - stellen, - <span class="todo">pressing 'K' opens the key bindings configuration - menu,</span> - en als laatste kan de informatiebalk worden aangepast worden - met de toets 'N'. -</p> - -<h2>5.1 Algemene opties<a name="options_general"></a></h2> -<p> - Met de volgende opties kan <code>calcurse</code> naar wens ingesteld - worden:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>automatisch_opslaan</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Door deze optie wordt de data van de gebruiker automatisch opgeslagen - (indien ingesteld op <span class="emp">ja</span>) bij het - afsluiten. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Let op:</span> - De data wordt niet automatisch opgeslagen als - <code>automatisch_opslaan</code> ingesteld is op <span class="emp">nee</span>. Dit - betekent dat de gebruiker op 'S' moet drukken om de gewijzigde data te - bewaren.</p> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">periodic_save</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If different from '0', user's data will be automatically - saved every <span class="emp">periodic_save</span> minutes. - When an automatic save is performed, two asterisks - (i.e. '<code>**</code>') will appear on the top right-hand side - of the screen).</span> - </dd> - - <dt><code>einde_bevestigen</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Bij het beëindigen van <code>calcurse</code>, zal er om een - bevestiging worden gevraagd, als de optie op <span class="emp">ja</span> is ingesteld. - Zoniet, dan zal <code>calcurse</code> zonder bevestigingsvraag - eindigen, als er op 'Q' wordt gedrukt. - </dd> - <dt><code>bevestig_verwijderen</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Als deze optie op <span class="emp">ja</span> is ingesteld, zal er om een bevestiging - gevraagd worden voor het wissen van een item door middel van een - toetsdruk op 'D' (dit kan een <span class="emp">todo</span>, <span class="emp">afspraak</span>, of - <span class="emp">gebeurtenis</span> zijn. Anders zal er geen bevestiging nodig zijn - voor het wissen van een item. - </dd> - <dt><code>overslaan_systeem_dialoog</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">nee</span>)</dt> - <dd>Als deze optie ingesteld is op <span class="emp">ja</span> zullen de systeem dialogen - gerelateerd aan het opslaan en laden van data worden overgeslagen. Dit - zorgt ervoor dat <code>calcurse</code> sneller opstart en afsluit. - </dd> - <dt><code>overslaan_progressie_balk</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">nee</span>)</dt> - <dd>Indien ingesteld op <span class="emp">ja</span>, zal deze optie er voor zorgen dat de - progressie balk, die normaal gesproken getoond wordt bij het opslaan - van data naar bestand, verdwijnt. Ingesteld op <span class="emp">ja></span>, wordt de - progressie balk getoond samen met de bestandsnaam. (zie sectie <a - href="#basics_files"><code>calcurse</code> bestanden</a>). - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">calendar_default_view</span></code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to <span class="emp">0</span>, the monthly calendar view will be - displayed by default otherwise it is the weekly view that will be displayed.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code>week_begint_op_maandag</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Er kan gekozen worden tussen maandag en zondag als de eerste dag van - de week. Als <span class="emp">week_begint_op_maandag</span> ingesteld is op - <span class="emp">ja</span>, dan zal maandag als eerste staan in het kalender - overzicht. Anders staat zondag als eerste dag van de week. - </dd> - - <dt><code>output_datefmt</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">%D</span>)</dt> - <dd>Deze optie geeft het te gebruiken formaat aan bij datums in - niet-interactieve modus. Standaard worden de datums als volgt - weergegeven: <span class="emp">mm/dd/aa</span>. Het is - mogelijk om alle mogelijke formaten te zien, door <code>man 3 - strftime</code> in een terminal in te typen.</dd> - <dt><code>input_datefmt</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">1</span>)</dt> - <dd>Met deze optie wordt het formaat aangeven dat zal worden - gebruikt om datums in te voern in <span - class="emp">calcurse</span>. Er zijn <span class="todo">four</span> keuzes: <ol> - <li>mm/dd/yyyy</li> - <li>dd/mm/yyyy</li> - <li>yyyy/mm/dd</li> - <li>yyyy-mm-dd</li> - </ol> - </dd> - </dl> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.2 Key bindings<a name="options_keys"></a></h2> -<p> - One can define it's own keybindings within the 'Keys' configuration - menu. The default keys look like the one used by the <code>vim</code> - editor, especially the displacement keys. Anyway, within this - configuration menu, users can redefine all of the keys available from - within calcurse's user interface.</p> -<p> - To define new keybindings, first highlight the action to which it will - apply. Then, delete the actual key binding if necessary, and add a new - one. You will then be asked to press the key corresponding to the new - binding. It is possible to define more than one key binding for a single - action.</p> -<p> - An automatic check is performed to see if the new key binding - is not already set for another action. In that case, you will be asked - to choose a different one. Another check is done when exiting from this - menu, to make sure all possible actions have a key associated with it.</p> -<p> - The following keys can be used to define bindings: - <ul> - <li>lower-case, upper-case letters and numbers, such as 'a', 'Z', '0'</li> - <li>CONTROL-key followed by one of the above letters</li> - <li>escape, horizontal tab, and space keys</li> - <li>arrow keys (up, down, left, and right)</li> - <li>'HOME' and 'END' keys</li> - </ul> </p> -<p> - While inside the key configuration menu, an online help is available for - each one of the available actions. This help briefly describes what the - highlighted action is used for.</p> -</div> - -<h2>5.3 Kleurenschema's<a name="options_colors"></a></h2> -<p> - De kleurenschema's van <code>calcurse</code> zijn aan te passen aan de - wensen van de gebruiker. Om het standaard schema te wijzigen, zijn er - in het configuratiescherm de mogelijke opties weergegeven voor voor- - en achtergrondkleuren. Door met de pijltjes-toetsen of de - <code>calcurse</code>-toetsen de cursor te verplaatsen, en met 'X' of - spatie een kleur te selecteren, kan de gebruiker de kleur toegepast - zien. Het is ook mogelijk om de standaard kleuren van de terminal te - gebruiken. Selecteer hiervoor de corresponderende optie. -</p> -<p> - De kleuren van de randen, titels, toetshulp, en algemene informatie - binnen de statusbalk zullen worden aangepast. Er is ook een zwart-wit - schema, voor terminals die geen kleuren ondersteunen.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - Afhankelijk van het type terminal en van de <code>$TERM</code> - omgevingsvariabele, is het mogelijk dat kleur wel of niet wordt - ondersteund. Indien gepoogd wordt de kleuren te veranderen, terwijl de - terminal geen kleuren ondersteund, zal er een foutbericht - verschijnen. - Als bekend is dat de terminal kleuren ondersteund, maar niet - getoond worden door <code>calcurse</code>, probeerd dan om de waarde - van de <code>$TERM</code> variabele te veranderen in iets anders - (zoals bijvoorbeeld <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span>) - </p> - -<h2>5.4 Layout configuratie<a name="options_layout"></a></h2> -<p> - De layout stelt de positie van de panels van <code>calcurse</code> in. - Bij de standaard layout is de positie van het kalender panel in de - terminal rechtsboven, het todo-panel rechtsonder, en het afspraken - panel wordt aan de linkerkant van het scherm getoond (zie het figuur - in sectie <a href="#basics_interface_interactive">Interactieve - modus</a> voor een voorbeeld van de standaard layout). - Door een andere layout te kiezen in het configuratie scherm, kan de - gebruiker <code>calcurse</code> zo het beste aan zijn behoeftes - aanpassen.</p> - -<div class="todo"> -<p> - The following option is used to modify the layout configuration:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>layout</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Eight different layouts are to be chosen from (see layout - configuration screen for the description of the available layouts).</dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<div class="todo"> -<h2>5.5 Sidebar configuration<a name="options_sidebar"></a></h2> -<p> - The sidebar is the part of the screen which contains two panels: - the calendar and, depending on the chosen layout, either the todo - list or the appointment list.</p> -<p> - The following option is used to change the width of the sidebar:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>side-bar_width</code> - (default: <span class="emp">0</span>)</dt> - <dd>Width (in percentage, 0 being the minimum width) of the side bar.</dd> - </dl> -</div> - -<h2>5.6 Informatiebalk instellingen<a name="options_notify"></a></h2> -<p> - De volgende opties stelt het gedrag van de informatiebalk in:</p> - <dl> - <dt><code>informatiebalk_toon</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">ja</span>)</dt> - <dd>Deze optie stelt in of de informatiebalk getoond wordt op het scherm - of niet.</dd> - <dt><code>informatiebalk_datum</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">%a %F</span>)</dt> - <dd>Door middel van deze optie, kan ingesteld worden hoe de datum wordt - weergegeven in de informatiebalk. Alle mogelijkheden kunnen gezien - worden door <code>man 3 strftime</code> in de terminal te typen.</dd> - <dt><code>informatiebalk_tijd</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">%T</span>)</dt> - <dd>Door middel van deze optie, kan insteld worden hoe de huidige tijd - wordt weergegeven in de informatiebalk. weergegeven in de - informatiebalk. Alle mogelijkheden kunnen gezien worden door - <code>man 3 strftime</code> in de terminal te typen.</dd> - <dt><code>informatiebalk_waarschuwing</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">300</span>)</dt> - <dd>Indien een afspraak binnen de tijd valt die is ingesteld in - 'informatiebalk_waarschuwing', begint de weergave van die boodschap te - knipperen. Zo wordt de gebruiker gewaarschuwd, dat er een op handen - zijnde afspraak is. Bovendien zal het commando uitgevoerd worden dat - is gedefinieerd door informatiebalk_commando.</dd> - <dt><code>informatiebalk_commando</code> - (standaard: <span class="emp">printf '\a'</span>)</dt> - <dd>Deze optie geeft het commando weer dat wordt uitgevoerd wanneer er een - op handen zijnde afspraak is, die gemarkeerd is als 'belangrijk'. Het - commando zal naar de shell van de gebruiker gestuurd worden, waar het - door de shell uitgevoerd wordt. Om van de gewenste shell gebruik te - maken, wordt gebruik gemaakt van de <code>$SHELL</code> - omgevingsvariabele. Er wordt gebruik gemaakt van <code>/bin/sh</code>, - indien de variabele leeg is. - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Voorbeeld:</span> - Stel dat het commando <code>mail</code> uit te - voeren is op het systeem van de gebruiker. Men kan dan het volgende - commando gebruiken om op de hoogte gesteld te worden van een op handen - zijnde afspraak (de beschrijving van de afspraak zal ook te zien zijn - in de body van de mail):</p> - <code> -calcurse --next | mail -s "[calcurse] upcoming appointment!" user@host.com - </code> - </dd> - - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_enable</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, daemon mode will be enabled, meaning <code>calcurse</code> - will run into background when the user's interface is exited. This will allow the - notifications to be launched even when the interface is not running. More details - can be found in section <a href="#basics_daemon">'Background mode'</a>.</span> - </dd> - <dt><code><span class="todo">notify-daemon_log</code> - (default: <span class="emp">no</span>)</span></dt> - <dd><span class="todo">If set to yes, <code>calcurse</code> daemon activity will be logged (see section - <a href="#basics_files">files</a></span>). - </dd> - - </dl> - -<h1>6. bekende bugs<a name="bekende_bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Wanneer <code>calcurse</code> gebruikt maakt van een zwart-wit schema - terwijl de <code>$TERM</code> variabele is ingesteld op - <span class="emp">xterm-color</span>, zullen er verkeerde items gemarkeerd worden. - Gebruik om deze bug op te lossen, <span class="emp">xterm-xfree86</span> in plaats van - <span class="emp">xterm-color</span> in de variabele <code>$TERM</code>, - adviseert Thomas E. Dickey (<code>xterm</code> maintainer):</p> - <blockquote class="rq"> - "De waarde van xterm-color voor $TERM is geen goede keuze voor XFree86 - xterm, omdat het vaak gebruikt wordt voor een optie in terminfo, dat - bce niet ondersteunt. Maak gebruik van de xterm-xfree86 optie die met - de xterm van XFree86 wordt gedistribueerd (of eenzelfde die wordt - gedistribueerd met ncurses)." - </blockquote> - -<h1>7. Het melden van bugs en aanmerkingen<a name="bugs"></a></h1> -<p> - Meldt bugs en aanmerkingen alstublieft aan:</p> - <pre>calcurse @ culot . org</pre> -<p> - Of aan de auteur:</p> - <pre>frederic @ culot . org</pre> - -<h1>8. Hoe kan ik helpen?<a name="contribute"></a></h1> -<p> - Mocht je mee willen helpen aan het project, dan kan je ten eerste - laten weten wat je wel en niet goed vindt, en of er nog dingen zijn - die je mist in <code>calcurse</code>. - Ook wordt het vertalen van <code>calcurse</code> berichten en - documentatie zeer gewaardeerd.</p> - <p class="rq"><span class="valorise">Noot:</span> - Alle hulp bij het 'internationaliseren' van - <code>calcurse</code> wordt zeer op prijs gesteld, maar voordat je - begint, mail dan eerst naar <code>calcurse-i18n @ culot . org</code>, om - te weten te komen of iemand anders al met een vertaling naar jouw taal - bezig is.</p> - -<h2>8.1 Vertalen van de documentatie<a name="contribute_documentation"></a></h2> -<p> - De <span class="emp">doc/</span> directory van het bronpakket bevat alle vertalingen - van de handleidingen van <code>calcurse</code>. Als de handleiding van - je moedertaal echter nog niet aanwezig is, wordt het zeer op prijs - gesteld als je kunt helpen met de vertaling.</p> -<p> - Kopieer eenvoudig de bestaande handleiding naar - <code>manual_XX.html</code>, waar <span class="emp">XX</span> de code is van je taal. - Vertaal dan het zojuist aangemaakte bestand en zend het naar de - auteur (zie <a href="#bugs">Het melden van bugs en aanmerkingen</a>), - zodat het bij de volgende versie van <code>calcurse</code> gevoegd can - worden.</p> - -<h2>8.2 <code>calcurse</code> i18n<a name="contribute_i18n"></a></h2> -<p> - Zoals eerder gezegd, maakt <code>calcurse</code> gebruikt van - <code>gettext</code> om berichten weer te geven in meerdere talen. - Deze sectie informeert hoe de berichten te vertalen in je moedertaal. - Deze howto is echter met opzet incompleet, en verlegt de focus op het - werken met <code>gettext</code> voor <code>calcurse</code>. Voor meer - gespecificeerde informatie of om het grotere geheel te begrijpen, is - er de <code>GNU gettext</code> handleiding:</p> - <pre>http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/</pre> -<p> - In principe, zijn er drie verschillende mensen bezig in de - vertaalketen: programmeurs, de vertaal coördinator, en de vertalers. - Na in vogelvlucht uit te leggen hoe dingen werken, zal de taak van de - vertaler beschreven worden.</p> - -<h3>8.2.1 Overzicht<a name="contribute_i18n_overview"></a></h3> -<p> - Om het mogelijk te maken om teksten weer te geven in de taal van de - gebruiker, zijn er twee stappen vereist: <span class="emp">internationalisatie</span> - (i18n) en <span class="emp">localisatie</span> (l10n).</p> -<p> - i18n zorgt ervoor dat - <code>calcurse</code> meerdere talen ondersteund. De programmeurs - markeren de te vertalen tekst (strings genaamd) en bieden een manier - aan om deze direct te vertalen als <code>calcurse</code> gestart is.</p> -<p> - l10n zorgt ervoor dat de i18n-de <code>calcurse</code> zich instelt op - de taal van de gebruiker, dus worden de door de programmeurs - gemarkeerde strings vertaald, en wordt de omgeving correct ingesteld, - zodat <code>calcurse</code> gebruik kan maken van de vertaling.</p> -<p> - Dus, de te vertalen strings worden eerst gemarkeerd door de - programmeurs binnen in de <code>C</code> broncode, dan worden ze - verzameld in een sjabloon bestand (<span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> - de - <span class="emp">pot</span> extensie staat voor <span class="emp">portable object template</span>, - wat zoiets als overdraagbaar object sjabloon betekent). De inhoud van - deze sjabloonbestanden worden dan samengevoegd met de vertaalbestanden - van elke taal (<span class="emp">fr.po</span> voor frans, bijvoorbeeld - waar - <span class="emp">po</span> voor <span class="emp">portable object</span> staat, dus bedoeld om - gelezen en gewijzigd te worden door mensen). Dit bestand wordt door een - vertaalteam vertaald, en verzonden naar de ontwikkelaars. Bij het - compileren wordt voor efficientie een binaire versie van dit bestand - gemaakt (<span class="emp">fr.mo</span> - <span class="emp">mo</span> staat voor <span class="emp">machine - object</span>, dus met als doel gelezen te worden door programma's), en - geïnstalleerd. <code>calcurse</code> gebruikt dit bestand dan, om de - strings te vertalen volgende de instellingen van de locale van de - gebruiker.</p> - -<h3>8.2.2 Taken van de vertaler<a name="contribute_i18n_translator"></a></h3> -<p> - Stel dat iemand met het vertalen naar een nieuwe taal wil beginnen. - Dan zijn dit de stappen die gevolgd moeten worden:</p> - <ul> - <li>Vindt eerst uit wat de naam van de locale is. Voor frans - bijvoorbeeld is het 'fr_FR', of simpelweg 'fr'. Dit is de waarde die - in de omgevingsvariabele <code>LC_ALL</code> moet staan om software te - vertalen (zie <a href="#basics_invocation_variable">De i18n - omgevingsvariabele</a>).</li> - <li>Ga dan naar de <span class="emp">po/</span> directory, en maak nieuwe - po-bestanden aan met het volgende commando: - <code>'msginit -i calcurse.pot -o fr.po -l fr --no-translator'</code> - Indien <code>msginit</code> niet aanwezig is op het systeem, kopieer - dan simpelweg het <span class="emp">calcurse.pot</span> bestand en hernoem het naar - bijvoorbeeld <span class="emp">fr.po</span> en wijzig de header - handmatig.</li> - </ul> -<p> - Nu <span class="emp">fr.po</span> aangemaakt is, kan de vertaler beginnen.</p> - -<h3>8.2.3 po-bestanden<a name="contribute_i18n_po-files"></a></h3> -<p> - De indeling van de po-bestanden is vrij simpel. Po-bestanden bestaan - uit vier onderdelen:</p> - <ol> - <li><span class="emp">locatie regels:</span> informeert waar de strings gevonden - kunnen worden (bestandsnaam en regelnummer), in het geval dat je het - een beetje in context wilt zien.</li> - <li><span class="emp">msgid regels:</span> de te vertalen strings.</li> - <li><span class="emp">msgstr regels:</span> de vertaalde strings.</li> - <li><span class="emp">regels met een '#' ervoor:</span> commentaar (sommige met een - speciale betekenis, zoals we verderop zullen zien).</li> - </ol> -<p> - Eigenlijk, hoef je alleen de <span class="emp">msgstr</span> regels te vullen met de - vertaling van bovenstaande <span class="emp">msgid</span> regels.</p> -<p> - <span class="valorise">Een paar aanmerkingen:</span> - <dl> - <dt><span class="emp">Fuzzy strings</span></dt> - <dd>Wanneer je een string tegenkomt die gemarkeerd is met <code>"#, - fuzzy"</code>, zal <code>calcurse</code> de vertaling niet gebruiken - totdat je iets verandert. 'Fuzzy' betekent dat de string al vertaald - is, maar sindsdien is veranderd in de broncode van het programma, of - dat het een nieuwe string is, waar <code>gettext</code> zelf een ruwe - vertaling van heeft gemaakt, gebaseerd op andere strings in het - bestand. Het komt erop neer dat je de vertaling moet nakijken. Soms is - er een kleine verandering in de originele string, omdat er een typfout - is verbeterd. In dit geval hoeft er niets te veranderen. Maar het kan - ook zo zijn dat de vertaling niet juist meer is, en een verandering - noodzakelijk is. Als de vertaling weer in orde is, wis dan de regel - met <code>"#, fuzzy"</code>, en dan zal de vertaling weer gebruikt - worden in <code>calcurse</code>.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">c-format strings en speciale tekens</span></dt> - <dd>Sommige string hebben het volgende commentaar: <code>"#, - c-format"</code>. Dit betekent dat een deel van de te vertalen string - een speciale betekenis heeft voor het programma, en niet veranderd mag - worden. Bijvoorbeeld, het teken %, gebruikt als <code>"%s"</code>. Dit - betekent dat <code>calcurse</code> dit teken zal vervangen met een - andere string. Het is dus belangrijk dat het niet verwijderd wordt. Er - zijn ook andere tekens zoals \, gebruikt als <code>\n</code> of - <code>\t</code>. Verander ook deze niet. Het zijn respectievelijk - tekens voor einde-van-de-regel, en een tab.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Vertalingen mogen afgebroken worden</span></dt> - <dd>Zodra een regel te lang wordt, kan je hem splitsen als volgt: - <pre> -msgid "" -"een hele lange regel" -"de volgende regel" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">het begin van het po-bestand</span></dt> - <dd>Aan het begin van het po-bestand, vormt de eerste string de 'header', - waar verschillende soorten informatie kan worden ingevuld. Het - belangrijkste is de karakterset. Het zou er als volgt uit moeten zien: - <pre> -"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n" - </pre> - Het is ook belangrijk dat het Last-Translator veld wordt ingevuld, - zodat nieuwe vertalers zich bij je kunnen aanmelden, of dat mensen - contact kunnen opnemen als ze aanvullingen hebben of typfouten - gevonden hebben. Je kan zowel een naam/bijnaam, of email adres - invulllen, zoals bijvoorbeeld: - <pre> -"Last-Translator: Frederic Culot <frederic@culot.org>\n" - </pre></dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Commentaar</span></dt> - <dd>Het toevoegen van commentaar (regels die beginnen met het karakter - '#', is een juiste manier om problemen met vertalingen te markeren - voor proeflezers of andere vertalers.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">De lengte van strings</span></dt> - <dd><code>calcurse</code> is een curses/console programma, dus het is nauw - verbonden met het aantal kolommen dat de terminal gebruikt. Dit is - iets om in gedachten te houden bij het vertalen. Vaak moet een string - op een enkele regel passen. Het beste is dus om niet zomaar de strings - te vertalen, maar om eerst te kijken waar ze weergegeven worden in het - programma, en pas dan te vertalen.</dd> - <dt><span class="emp">Een paar nuttige hulpmiddelen</span></dt> - <dd>Het po-bestandsformaat is vrij simpel, en het bestand kan gewijzigd - worden met een standaard tekst-editor. Maar er zijn een paar - gespecialiseerde hulpmiddelen, die je misschien handig vindt bij het - vertalen: - <ul> - <li><code>poEdit</code> (<a - href="http://www.poedit.org/" target="_blank"> - http://www.poedit.org/</a>)</li> - <li><code>KBabel</code> (<a - href="http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/" target="_blank"> - http://i18n.kde.org/tools/kbabel/</a>)</li> - <li><code>GTranslator</code> (<a - href="http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/" target="_blank"> - http://gtranslator.sourceforge.net/</a>)</li> - <li><code>Emacs</code> po mode</li> - <li><code>Vim</code> po mode</li> - </ul> - </dd> - <dt><span class="emp">En als laatste</span></dt> - <dd>Ik hoop dat je het leuk vindt om bij te dragen aan een - 'geïnternationaliseerde' wereld. :) Mocht je nog vragen hebben, - schroom dat niet om contact met me op te nemen via - <span class="emp">frederic @ culot . org</span>. </dd> - </dl> - -<h1>9. Links<a name="links"></a></h1> -<p> - Deze sectie bevat links en referenties welke je misschien interesseren.</p> - -<h2>9.1 <code>calcurse</code> homepage<a name="links_homepage"></a></h2> -<p> - De <code>calcurse</code> homepage is hier te vinden:</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse</pre> - -<h2>9.2 <code>calcurse</code> mededelingenlijst<a name="links_list"></a></h2> -<p> - Mocht je interesse hebben in het project, en op de hoogte wilt worden - gehouden als er een nieuwe versie uitkomt, kan je jezelf inschrijven - op de <code>calcurse</code> mededelingenlijst. Je ontvangt dan een - email zodra er iets nieuws is in <code>calcurse</code>.</p> -<p> - Om je in te schrijven, zend dan een email naar - <code>calcurse-announce @ culot . org</code> met "subscribe" - ingevuld bij 'onderwerp'.</p> - -<h2><code>9.3 calcurse</code> RSS feed<a name="links_rss"></a></h2> -<p> - Nog een mogelijkheid om op de hoogte te blijven over nieuwe versies - is om de RSS feed te volgen:</p> - <pre>http://culot.org/calcurse/news_rss.xml</pre> -<p> - Deze RSS feed wordt iedere keer vernieuwd als er een nieuwe versie van - calcurse beschikbaar is, waarbij ook de nieuwe opties beschreven - worden. </p> - -<h2>9.4 Links<a name="links_others"></a></h2> -<p> - Voor meer informatie over het ical-formaatspecificatie (rfc2445): - <pre>http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2445</pre> -<p> - De pcal projectpagina kan hier gevonden worden: - <pre>http://pcal.sourceforge.net/</pre> - -<h1>10. Dankwoord<a name="thanks"></a></h1> -<p> - Het is tijd om de mensen te bedanken, zonder wie dit programma niet - zou bestaan! Hier is een lijst met mensen die ik graag wil bedanken: - <ul> - <li>Alex voor zijn patches, hulp en advies met het programmeren in - <code>C</code> </li> - <li>Gwen voor het testen en voor de discussies om - <code>calcurse</code> te verbeteren</li> - <li>Herbert voor het maken van een pakket voor <code>calcurse</code> - voor FreeBSD </li> - <li>Zul voor het maken van een pakket voor <code>calcurse</code> voor - NetBSD</li> - <li>Wain, Steffen and Ronald voor het maken van een pakket voor <code>calcurse</code> voor - Archlinux</li> - <li>Kevin, Ryan, en fEnIo voor het maken van een pakket voor - <code>calcurse</code> voor Debian en Ubuntu</li> - <li>Pascal voor het maken van een pakket voor <code>calcurse</code> - voor Slackware</li> - <li>Alexandre en Markus voor het maken van een pakket voor - <code>calcurse</code> voor Mac OsX en Darwin</li> - <li>Igor voor het maken van een pakket voor <code>calcurse</code> for - ALT Linux</li> - <li>Joel voor zijn kalender script waarop de kalenderview van - <code>calcurse</code> geïnspireerd is</li> - <li>Michael Schulz en Chris M. voor de duitse vertaling van - <code>calcurse</code> en handleiding</li> - <li>Jose Lopez voor de spaanse vertaling van <code>calcurse</code> en - handleiding</li> - <li>Neil Williams voor de engelse vertaling</li> - <li>Leandro Noferini voor de italian vertaling</li> - <li>Tony voor zijn patch die de recur_item_inday functie verbeterde - , en voor het implementeren van de datumformaat - configuratie-opties</span></li> - <li>Jeremy Roon voor de nederlandse vertaling van - <code>calcurse</code> en handleiding</li> - <li>Erik Saule voor zijn patch, waarmee de '-N', '-s', '-S', '-r' en '-D' - vlaggen zijn geïmplementeerd</li> - <li>en de mensen die de software geschreven hebben die ik goed vind - en mij geïnspireerd hebben zoals: - <ul> - <li><code>vim</code> voor de toetsen die de cursor verplaatsen</li> - <li><code>orpheus</code> en <code>abook</code> voor de - documentatie</li> - <li><code>pine</code> en <code>aptitude</code> - voor de tekstinterface</li> - <li><span class="todo"><code>tmux</code> for coding style</span></li> - </ul></li> - </ul> -</p> -<p> - En als laatste wil ik graag de mensen bedanken die - <code>calcurse</code> gebruiken, en mij aanvullingen en opbouwende - kritiek stuurden.</p> - -<div class="footer"> - Copyright © 2004-2010 Frédéric Culot<br> - Calcurse version 2.8 - Last change: March 29th, 2010<br> -</div> -</div> - -</body> -</html> |